Free Shipping on Equipment & Parts orders of $200 or more! * Click for Restrictions

Have a question? 800-440-6723 International: 803-252-0100

English Se habla español
Parts › PartFinder › Advance SC6500 › Service manual
Form 56043168, Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17
Advance · Floor scrubber service manual

Advance SC6500 Service Manual

56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17213 pages56414010 SC6500 40C, 56414011 SC6500 40C ECOFLEX, 56414012 SC6500 40D, 56414013 SC6500 40D ECOFLEX, 56414014 SC6500 45C, 56414015 SC6500 45C ECOFLEX, 56414016 SC6500 45D, 56414017 SC6500 45D ECOFLEX, 56414018 SC6500 48C, 56414019 SC6500 48C ECOFLEX, 56414020 SC6500 48D, 56414021 SC6500 48D ECOFLEX (Advance); 56414022 SC6500 1100D, 56414023 SC6500 1100C, 56414024 SC6500 1300D, 56414025 SC6500 1300C, 56414026 SC6500 1100D ECOFLEX (Nilfisk)
Before first use: charge the batteries overnight before you run the machine the first time.
Free to read, no account neededEvery page has its own linkPart numbers link to the part
SERVICE MANUAL

SC6500 service manual

Form No. 56043168. 01/15, revised 12/17. English.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌⁠⁠​​⁠‍​⁠​⁠‌​​‌⁠‍‍​⁠⁠‍

Advance model numbers:

  • 56414010 SC6500 40C
  • 56414011 SC6500 40C ECOFLEX
  • 56414012 SC6500 40D
  • 56414013 SC6500 40D ECOFLEX
  • 56414014 SC6500 45C
  • 56414015 SC6500 45C ECOFLEX
  • 56414016 SC6500 45D
  • 56414017 SC6500 45D ECOFLEX
  • 56414018 SC6500 48C
  • 56414019 SC6500 48C ECOFLEX
  • 56414020 SC6500 48D
  • 56414021 SC6500 48D ECOFLEX

Nilfisk model numbers:

  • 56414022 SC6500 1100D
  • 56414023 SC6500 1100C
  • 56414024 SC6500 1300D
  • 56414025 SC6500 1300C
  • 56414026 SC6500 1100D ECOFLEX
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 1, used with permission. SES ref PF-BQWA-O35E‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌⁠⁠​​⁠‍​⁠​⁠‌​​‌⁠‍‍​⁠⁠‍
01/15 Revised 12/17 Form No. 56043168Page 1 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

General Information

Chassis System

Control System

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 2, used with permission. SES ref PF-6M6Y-266T‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌⁠‌‌‍‌​​⁠⁠‍‌​‌‌‍‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 2 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Contents (continued)

Electrical System

Options and Accessories

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 3, used with permission. SES ref PF-TTSE-PD3X‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌‍‍⁠​‍​‍‌​⁠⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 3 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Contents (continued)

Recovery System

Scrub System, Cylindrical

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 4, used with permission. SES ref PF-N7PV-UGG3‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‌‌‍‌‍​‌​​​‌​‌‍‌​‍‍‌​​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 4 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Contents (continued)

Scrub System, Disc

Solution System

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 5, used with permission. SES ref PF-3T2V-UIY4‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‍‌⁠​‍⁠⁠‌‌‌‌‌​​‌‌​​​‍‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 5 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Contents (continued)

Squeegee System

Steering System

Sweep System, Side Broom

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 6, used with permission. SES ref PF-RMEJ-VMEE‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠⁠‍‍​​‍⁠‌​⁠​‍⁠⁠​​‍​​‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 6 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Contents (continued)

Wheel System, Non-traction

Wheel System, Traction

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 7, used with permission. SES ref PF-YTLC-6VZ5‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‌​‍⁠⁠​⁠‍‌‌⁠​‌‌‌‌‌​⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 7 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

This page is intentionally blank.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‍‌​‌‍‌⁠⁠‌​⁠‍‌‍​​‌​​⁠‍

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 8, used with permission. SES ref PF-S4A3-6T7B‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‍‌​‌‍‌⁠⁠‌​⁠‍‌‍​​‌​​⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 8 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

General information

General machine description

The SC6500 machines are battery powered ride-on scrubbing machines. Specific models may be equipped with either cylindrical or disc style scrub decks in several different sizes.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​‍​​⁠​‍‌‌​⁠‍‍⁠​‌‌‌⁠​⁠⁠

Service manual purpose and application

This Service Manual a technical resource designed to aid service personnel in maintaining and repairing the SC6500 scrubber to ensure optimum performance and long service life. Please read it thoroughly before servicing the machine.

Conventions

All references to right, left, front and rear in this manual are as seen from the Operator’s seat position.

Feedback

All comments and suggestions for improving this manual should be emailed to [email protected]. Please include the service manual title, form number, revision date found on the front cover with your communication.

Revision history

DateDetails
01/2015First Release
12/2017Minor update to deck actuator procedure, and repair headings

Other manuals and information sources

Electronic databases

The manuals listed below can be found on Advance’s electronic supported databases. They are:

  • Advance Dealer Customer Zone
  • EzParts service / parts CD-ROM
  • Nilfisk-Advance website: www.nilfisk-advance.com

Manuals

  • Parts List - Form Number 56042608
  • Instructions for Use - Form Number 56091095 (English, Spanish. Portugese, French)
  • Curtis Programmer Manual Number 56043101
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 9, used with permission. SES ref PF-RPWJ-JMVR‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​‍​​⁠​‍‌‌​⁠‍‍⁠​‌‌‌⁠​⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 9 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Parts and service

Repairs should be performed by an Authorized Nilfisk-Advance Service Center, which employs factory-trained service personnel and maintains an inventory of Nilfisk-Advance original replacement parts and accessories.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍​‌‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‌⁠​​‌‍​​⁠‌‌

Nameplate

The Model Number and Serial Number of your machine are shown on the machine nameplate. This information is needed for selecting the correct technical documentation and when ordering repair parts for the machine.

“Part No” on the label is equivalent to the machine “Model Number”

Photo of a machine nameplate: Model SC6500 1100D ECOFLEX, Part No. 56414026, Serial No. 1000055683, Code L14, 36 V DC, IPX3, G.V.W. 3220 lb (1460 kg), maximum gradient 10.5%, CE mark, Nilfisk logo
Nameplate example (p010-a)

Note that the Nameplate is attached to the rear of the steering column.

Drawing of the steering column seen from behind with a callout labeled Nameplate pointing to the rear of the column
Nameplate location (p010-b)

Transporting the machine

Caution! Before transporting the machine on an open truck or trailer, make sure that:
  • The machine is tied down securely using approved tie down points.
  • All access doors and covers are secured (tape or remove as needed).
  • The battery/batteries are disconnected.
  • Excessive strap force on rotomold plastic parts will cause permanent damage.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 10, used with permission. SES ref PF-IZEK-XRXD‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍​‌‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‌⁠​​‌‍​​⁠‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 10 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Towing

Caution! If the machine must be towed or pushed, make sure the Master On/Off Key Switch is in the Off position. Do not move the machine faster than a normal walking pace (2-3 mph, 3-5 kph) and for short distances only.

Note: Disconnecting the wheel drive motor wiring connector will make a disabled machine easier to push.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍‌⁠‍​​​⁠‍​⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠‌​‌

Caution and warning symbols

Advance uses the symbols below to signal potentially dangerous conditions. Read this information carefully and take the necessary steps to protect personnel and property.

Danger! Is used to warn of immediate hazards that will cause severe personal injury or death.
Warning! Is used to call attention to a situation that could cause severe personal injury.
Caution! Is used to call attention to a situation that could cause minor personal injury or damage to the machine or other property.

Read all instructions before using.

General safety instructions

Specific Cautions and Warnings are included to warn you of potential danger of machine damage or bodily harm.

Warning!
  • This machine is to be used only by correctly trained and authorized persons.
  • Avoid sudden stops while on ramps or inclines when the tanks are full. Avoid abrupt sharp turns. Use low speed down hills. Clean only while ascending (driving up) the ramp.
  • Keep sparks, flame and smoking materials away from batteries. Explosive gases are vented during normal operation.
  • Charging the batteries produces highly-explosive hydrogen gas. Charge batteries only in well-ventilated areas, away from open flame. Do not smoke while charging the batteries.
  • Remove all jewelry when working near electrical components.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 11, used with permission. SES ref PF-4GZI-NBBN‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍‌⁠‍​​​⁠‍​⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠‌​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 11 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
Warning! (continued)
  • Turn the key switch off (O) and disconnect the batteries before servicing electrical components.
  • Never work under a machine without safety blocks or stands to support the machine.
  • Do not dispense flammable cleaning agents, operate the machine on or near these agents, or operate in areas where flammable liquids exist.
  • Only use the brushes provided with the machine or those specified in the instruction manual. The use of other brushes may impair safety.
Caution!
  • This machine is not approved for use on public paths or roads.
  • This machine is not suitable for picking up hazardous dust.
  • Do not use scarifier discs and grinding stones. Advance will not be held responsible for any damage to floor surfaces caused by scarifiers or grinding stones. (This can also damage the brush drive system.)
  • When operating this machine, ensure that third parties, particularly children, are not endangered.
  • Before performing any service function, carefully read all instructions pertaining to that function.
  • Do not leave the machine unattended without first turning the key switch off (O), removing the key and applying the parking brake.
  • Turn the key switch off (O) and remove the key before changing the brushes, and before opening any access panels.
  • Take precautions to prevent hair, jewelry or loose clothing from becoming caught in moving parts.
  • Use caution when moving this machine in below-freezing temperature conditions. Any water in the solution, recovery or detergent tanks, or in the hose lines could freeze, causing damage to valves and fittings. Drain the tanks and purge with windshield washer fluid.
  • The batteries must be removed from the machine before the machine is scrapped. The disposal of the batteries should be done safely and in accordance with your local environmental regulations.
In shortThe safety lists on pages 11 to 13 apply to every service job on this machine. Before you work on electrical parts, turn the key switch off (O) and disconnect the batteries, and never work under the machine without safety blocks or stands. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you are unsure about a repair.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​⁠​‌‌⁠​‍⁠‌‌​‍⁠⁠​​‌​‌​‍
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 12, used with permission. SES ref PF-4BYO-WVC7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​⁠​‌‌⁠​‍⁠‌‌​‍⁠⁠​​‌​‌​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 12 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
Caution! (continued)
  • Do not use on surfaces having a gradient exceeding that marked on the machine.
  • All doors and covers are to be positioned as indicated in the instruction manual before using the machine.
Caution! Do not pressure-wash the operator control panel, circuit breaker panel or any electrical areas of the machine.

Emergency-stop switch/battery disconnect

The Emergency-stop/Battery Disconnect is the red lever located to the right of the Operator’s seat. In the event of an emergency, press the Emergency-stop/Battery Disconnect in (toward the rear of the machine) to disconnect the battery from the machine. This will stop all machine functions.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍​​​​⁠‍‍​​‌‍‌‌⁠‍​‌⁠‍‌

Photo of the red Emergency-stop/Battery Disconnect lever between two gray body panels, with a yellow EMERGENCY OFF, RESET UNDER PANEL label beside it and a callout pointing to the lever
Emergency-stop/Battery Disconnect (p013-a)

Save These Instructions

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 13, used with permission. SES ref PF-BQJT-NRG4‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍​​​​⁠‍‍​​‌‍‌‌⁠‍​‌⁠‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 13 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Technical specifications (as installed and tested on the unit)

Advance brand SC6500 models

Footnote * is on page 15 and footnote ** on pages 16 and 17.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‌​​​​⁠‍‍‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍​⁠‍‍⁠

Model (with and without EcoFlex)Unit40C / 40D45C / 45D48C / 48D
Model No.56414010, 56414011, 56414012, 5641401356414014, 56414015, 56414016, 5641401756414018, 56414019, 56414020, 56414021
Voltage, BatteriesV36V36V36V
Battery Capacity (max)Ah450450450
Protection GradeIPX3IPX3IPX3
Sound Pressure Level, IEC 60335-2-72: 2002 Amend. 1:2005, ISO 11201dB(A)/20µPa707070
Sound Pressure level - KpA (IEC 60335-2-72, ISO 11201) UncertaintydB(A)3.03.03.0
Gross Weight* - Cylindricallbs / kg3325 / 15083365 / 15263410 / 1547
Transportation Weight** - Cylindricallbs / kg2897 / 13142937 / 13322982 / 1353
Gross Weight* - Disclbs / kg3220 / 14603270 / 14833320 / 1506
Transportation Weight** - Disclbs / kg2792 / 12662842 / 12892892 / 1312
Maximum Wheel Floor Loading (center front)psi / kg/cm2116 / 8.15116 / 8.15116 / 8.15
Maximum Wheel Floor Loading (right rear)psi / kg/cm281 / 5.6981 / 5.6981 / 5.69
Maximum Wheel Floor Loading (left rear)psi / kg/cm286 / 6.0486 / 6.0486 / 6.04
Vibrations at the Hand Controls (ISO 5349-1)m/s2<1.12m/s2<1.12m/s2<1.12m/s2
Vibrations at the Hand Controls (ISO 5349-1) Uncertaintym/s2.11 m/s2.11 m/s2.11 m/s2
Vibrations at the Seat (EN 1032)m/s2<0.35m/s2<0.35m/s2<0.35m/s2
Vibrations at the Seat (EN 1032) Uncertaintym/s20.035m/s20.035m/s20.035m/s2
Gradeability Transport16% (9°)16% (9°)16% (9°)
Gradeability Cleaning10.5% (6°)10.5% (6°)10.5% (6°)
Machine Lengthinch / cm73.5 / 187
Machine Heightinch / cm58.5 / 148.6
Machine Height (w/overhead guard)inch / cm84 / 213
Machine Width at Rollers - Cylindricalinch / cm47.5 / 12153.5 / 13655.5 / 141
Machine Width at Rollers - Discinch / cm42.5 / 10851.5 / 13152.5 / 133
Machine Width with Squeegeeinch / cm49 / 125 “F”54 / 137 “G”57 / 145 “H”
Minimum Aisle Turn Widthinch / cm84 / 214
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 14, used with permission. SES ref PF-K22G-VTP5‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‌​​​​⁠‍‍‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍​⁠‍‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 14 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
Model (with and without EcoFlex)Unit40C / 40D45C / 45D48C / 48D
Model No.56414010, 56414011, 56414012, 5641401356414014, 56414015, 56414016, 5641401756414018, 56414019, 56414020, 56414021
Solution Tank CapacityGallon / L70 / 265
Recovery Tank CapacityGallon / L70 / 265
Transport Speed (Fwd. Maximum)mph / kph6.0 / 9.5
Transport Speed (Rev. Maximum)mph / kph3.0 / 5.0
Battery Compartment Size (approximate)
Height (maximum)inch / cm19 / 48.2
Width (maximum)inch / cm20 / 50.8
Length (maximum)inch / cm31.75 / 80.6
Scrub brush size
Outside Scrub Brush Diameter - Cylindrical (inside core is 5 in (12.7 cm))inch / cm8.5 / 21.6
Scrub Brush Length - Cylindrical (two brushes per machine)inch / cm38.37 / 97.4
Brush Diameter - Discinch / cm(Quantity of 2) 20 / 50.8(Quantity of 3) at 16 / 40.6(Quantity of 3) at 17 / 43
Scrub Brush Speed CylindricalRPM630630630
Scrub Brush Speed DiscRPM240225225
Brush Motor Powerhp / kW40C - 2 x 1.5/1.13; 40D - 1 x 3.0/2.2445C - 2 x 1.5/1.13; 45D - 3 x 1.5 / 1.1348C - 2 x 1.5/1.13; 48D - 3 x 1.5/1.13
Hopper Capacity - Cylindricalft3 / L0.40 / 110.44 / 12.50.50 / 14
Cleaning Path Width (scrubbing path)inch / cm40 / 10145 / 11448 / 122
Sweeping Path with side brooms - Cylindricalinch / cm57 / 145
Vacuum Motorhp / kW0.8 / 0.6 - dual vac optional
Waterliftin / cmSingle Vac - 64 / 163, Dual Vac - 67/170
Propulsion SystemVariable speed AC brushless drive
Propel motor (peak)hp / kW3.0 / 2.25

*Gross Weight: Standard machine without options, full solution tank and empty recovery tank, with removable scrub brushes and batteries installed.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠‍​​​⁠‍​‍⁠‍​‌‍‌‌⁠‍​‍⁠⁠

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 15, used with permission. SES ref PF-WYUY-5BFM‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠‍​​​⁠‍​‍⁠‍​‌‍‌‌⁠‍​‍⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 15 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

**Transportation Weight: Standard machine without options, empty solution and recovery tanks, with batteries installed and no operator.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‍‍‌​​⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠‌‍⁠

Nilfisk brand SC6500 models

Model (with and without EcoFlex)Unit1100C / 1100D1300C / 1300D
Model No56414023, 5641402256414025, 56414024
Voltage, BatteriesV36V36V
Battery CapacityAh480480
Protection GradeIPX3IPX3
Sound Pressure Level, IEC 60335-2-72: 2002 Amend. 1:2005, ISO 11201dB(A)/20µPa7070
Sound Pressure level - KpA (IEC 60335-2-72, ISO 11201) UncertaintydB(A)3.03.0
Gross Weight* - Cylindricallbs / kg3325 / 15083410 / 1547
Transportation Weight** - Cylindricallbs / kg2897 / 13142982 / 1353
Gross Weight* - Disclbs / kg3220 / 14603320 / 1506
Transportation Weight** - Disclbs / kg2792 / 12662892 / 1312
Maximum Wheel Floor Loading (center front)psi / kg/cm2116 / 8.15116 / 8.15
Maximum Wheel Floor Loading (right rear)psi / kg/cm281 / 5.6981 / 5.69
Maximum Wheel Floor Loading (left rear)psi / kg/cm286 / 6.0486 / 6.04
Vibrations at the Hand Controls (ISO 5349-1)m/s2<1.12m/s2<1.12m/s2
Vibrations at the Hand Controls (ISO 5349-1) Uncertaintym/s2.11 m/s2.11 m/s2
Vibrations at the Seat (EN 1032)m/s2<0.35m/s2<0.35m/s2
Vibrations at the Seat (EN 1032) Uncertaintym/s20.035m/s20.035m/s2
Gradeability - Transport16% (9°)16% (9°)
Gradeability - Cleaning10.5% (6°)10.5% (6°)
Machine Lengthinch / cm73.5 / 187
Machine Heightinch / cm58.5 / 148.6
Machine Height (w/overhead guard)inch / cm84 / 213
Machine Width at Rollers - Cylindricalinch / cm47.5 / 12155.5 / 141
Machine Width at Rollers - Discinch / cm42.5 / 10852.5 / 133
Machine Width with Squeegeeinch / cm49 / 125 “F”57 / 145 “H”
Minimum Aisle Turn Widthinch / cm84 / 214
Solution Tank CapacityGallon / L70 / 265
Recovery Tank CapacityGallon / L70 / 265
Transport Speed (Fwd. Maximum)mph / kph6.0 / 9.5
Transport Speed (Rev. Maximum)mph / kph3.0 / 5.0
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 16, used with permission. SES ref PF-M45R-27UT‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‍‍‌​​⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠‌‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 16 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
Model (with and without EcoFlex)Unit1100C / 1100D1300C / 1300D
Model No56414023, 5641402256414025, 56414024
Battery Compartment Size (approximate)
Height (maximum)inch / cm19 / 48.2
Width (maximum)inch / cm20 / 50.8
Length (maximum)inch / cm31.75 / 80.6
Scrub brush size
Outside Scrub Brush Diameter - Cylindrical (inside core is 5 in (12.7 cm))inch / cm8.5 / 21.6
Scrub Brush Length - Cylindrical (two brushes per machine)inch / cm38.37 / 97.4
Brush Diameter - Discinch / cm(Quantity of 2) 20 / 50.8(Quantity of 3) at 17 / 43
Scrub Brush Speed CylindricalRPM630630
Scrub Brush Speed DiscRPM240225
Hopper Capacity - Cylindricalft3 / L0.40 / 110.50 / 14
Cleaning Path Width (scrubbing path)inch / cm40 / 10148 / 122
Sweeping Path with side brooms - Cylindricalinch / cm57 / 145

*Gross Weight: Standard machine without options, full solution tank and empty recovery tank, with removable scrub brushes and batteries installed.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌‍‍‌​‌‌⁠⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍‍⁠⁠‌‌​​

**Transportation Weight: Standard machine without options, empty solution and recovery tanks, with batteries installed and no operator.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 17, used with permission. SES ref PF-XY3A-GQRW‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌‍‍‌​‌‌⁠⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍‍⁠⁠‌‌​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 17 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Dimensions

Dimension drawing of the machine in top view and side view. Top view shows Machine Width at Rollers and Width with Squeegee. Side view shows height 58.5 in (148.6 cm) and length 73.5 in (187 cm)
Dimensions, top view and side view (p018-a)
  • Machine length: 73.5 in (187 cm)
  • Machine height: 58.5 in (148.6 cm)
  • Machine width at rollers and width with squeegee: see the table on page 14.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 18, used with permission. SES ref PF-BRSL-QPXQ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‌​‍‍⁠⁠‌​⁠‍​​‍​⁠​⁠‌‌⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 18 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

General machine overview

Major machine components

Drawing of the machine with callouts: Recovery Tank Lid, Vacuum Motor Cover and Filter, Operator’s Seat Adjustment Lever, Solution Tank Fill Cover, Control Panel, Operator’s Seat, Battery Compartment (underneath recovery tank), Machine Battery Connector, Emergency-stop Switch/Battery Disconnect, Circuit Breakers, Steering Wheel Tilt/Adjust Knob, Brake Pedal/Parking Brake, Squeegee, Rear Wheel, Scrub Deck, Side Access Panel, Drive Pedal Direction/Speed, Drive/Steer Wheel. An inset label shows circuit breakers F1 3A, F2 15A and F3 20A
Major machine components (p019-a)

The label shown at the right of the drawing marks the circuit breakers: F1 3A, F2 15A and F3 20A.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠⁠‌⁠‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠​​‍⁠‍‍‍

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 19, used with permission. SES ref PF-ILXL-QFSS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠⁠‌⁠‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠​​‍⁠‍‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 19 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
Drawing of the machine with callouts: Recovery Tank Cover Assembly, Ball Float Cage, Squeegee Vacuum Hose, Recovery Tank Drain Hose, Squeegee Height Adjust Knob (two), Squeegee Tilt Adjust Knob, Squeegee Assembly, Solution Tank Drain Hose, Solution Shutoff Valve, Hopper (cylindrical models only), Solution Filter
Machine components, squeegee and tank hoses (p020-a)
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 20, used with permission. SES ref PF-PJZC-XY4E‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠​‍‍​⁠⁠‍​‌‌‍⁠‌​‌‌⁠‌‌⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 20 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Control panel

Switch and button functions

The controls on your rider scrubber were designed with one-touch operation in mind. For single-pass scrubbing, the user can simply depress one switch and all systems on will be activated. For most single-pass scrubbing operations, the operator should only need to use the middle switches on the control panel. These are the red Scrub Off and the green Scrub On/Pressure Increase Switches.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‌‍‍‍​​‌‍​​‌⁠​‍⁠​​‍‌‌​

Photo of the control panel with callouts: Solution Switch, Detergent Switch, Control Panel Display, Vacuum/Wand Switch, Scrub Speed Switch, Key Switch, Horn Button, Burst of Power, Scrub Off Switch, Scrub On/Pressure Increase Switch, Side Broom On/Down Switch, Traction Control Switch
Control panel switches and buttons (p021-a)
  • Key Switch – main power switch; controls the battery input to the machine’s main control board and the wheel drive speed control.
  • Scrub On/Pressure Increase Switch – functions as follows:

    If the scrub system is off, pressing this switch once will put the machine into the Auto Scrub mode. The following will occur:

    • The scrub system will be enabled with the scrub pressure set to the #1 normal setting.

      Note: Press the switch twice for #2 heavy scrub setting, and three times for the #3 extreme scrub setting. Pressing the switch a fourth time will return the system to the normal scrub setting.

    • The scrub deck and squeegee will automatically be lowered. On cylindrical models equipped with side brooms, the side brooms will be lowered.
    • The vacuum system will be enabled.
    • The solution and detergent systems will be enabled. Note that both the solution and detergent flow rates will correspond to the selected scrub pressure mode.
    • As soon as the drive pedal is moved from its neutral position, the scrub brushes and side brooms (if installed) will start turning, and the solution, detergent and vacuum systems will switch on.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 21, used with permission. SES ref PF-FK7I-YXLD‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‌‍‍‍​​‌‍​​‌⁠​‍⁠​​‍‌‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 21 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  • If the direction is forward, the solution and detergent flow will also start automatically.
  • If the direction is reverse, the solution and detergent flow will be stopped and the squeegee will be raised just enough to clear the floor surface.

Note: The solution, vacuum and detergent systems are automatically enabled when the Scrub On Switch is pressed to put the machine into the Auto Scrub mode. Any individual system can be toggled off and on by simply pressing the corresponding system switch at any time during scrubbing.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍⁠​‌‌‌⁠‍‍‍‌⁠⁠​‌​​⁠⁠‌⁠

If the machine is already scrubbing, pressing the Scrub On/Pressure Increase Switch will increase the scrub pressure to the next higher setting (toggling from regular to heavy, heavy to extreme, then back to normal). The Scrub Pressure Indicator will show the selected scrub pressure (one, two or three bars) in the Control Panel Display.

  • Scrub Off Switch – Pressing this switch when the machine is in the scrub mode will cause the following to occur:
    • The scrub brushes will turn off and the scrub deck will be raised to the up position. On cylindrical models equipped with side brooms, the side brooms will shut off and be raised.
    • The solution and detergent flow will be stopped.
    • Once forward machine motion stops, the vacuum/wand switch indicator light will start to blink. After a user-programmable time delay, the squeegee will be raised and the vacuum motors will shut off. Pressing the switch a second time before the vacuum time delay is complete will raise the squeegee and turn off the vacuum motors immediately.
  • Solution Switch – functions as follows:
    • If the scrub system is off, pressing and holding this switch will switch on the solution flow to pre-wet the floor. The solution flow will stop when the switch is released. Note this must be done prior to pressing the Scrub On Switch and putting the machine into the Auto Scrub mode.
    • If the machine is in the Auto Scrub mode, pressing this switch will disable the solution system. This is used if you wish to scrub without adding additional solution to the floor.
    • If the machine is in the Auto Scrub mode, you can press and hold the Solution Switch to actuate the solution flow override function. This override function allows you to select a different solution flow rate without changing the scrub pressure. Note that the machine is programmed for two additional higher solution flow rates plus the three normal default flow rates, for a total of five solution flow rates.

      To actuate the solution flow override function, press and hold the Solution Switch for three seconds until the Solution System Indicator flashes, then release it. You’ll have three seconds to select the desired solution flow rate by pressing the Solution Switch. The Solution Flow Indicator will show the selected solution flow rate (one through five bars) in the Control Panel Display. Note that if any scrub pressure change is made while in the solution override mode, the solution flow will return to its default solution flow rate.

  • Detergent Switch – functions as follows:
    • If the solution system is enabled, pressing this switch will toggle the detergent system off and on. When the detergent system is on, the detergent pumps will be activated at a specific rate when the drive pedal is actuated. The detergent pump will turn off when the drive pedal is in neutral or reverse.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 22, used with permission. SES ref PF-WHE6-TJWQ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍⁠​‌‌‌⁠‍‍‍‌⁠⁠​‌​​⁠⁠‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 22 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
In short The Vacuum/Wand switch does different things depending on whether the scrub system is on and whether the operator is in the seat. While scrubbing, travel speed is held to 80 percent of transport speed unless the Scrub Speed Switch is pressed. The Burst of Power button works differently in EcoFlex™ Mode 1 and Mode 2, and the ratio returns to the minimum after 60 seconds or another press of the button (Mode 2 is on page 24).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍‍​​​‍‍​​‍‍⁠⁠⁠‌​‌⁠⁠
  • If the solution system is off, the detergent pump will not turn on.
  • Vacuum/Wand Switch – functions as follows:
    • If the machine is in the Auto Scrub mode, pressing this switch once will raise the squeegee. The vacuum motors will run for a short time delay, then shut off. If you press the switch twice, the vacuum motors will shut off immediately. This is used if you wish to double-scrub (scrub without recovering the solution).
    • If the scrub system is off, the Vacuum/Wand Switch functions differently depending on whether the seat switch is open (no operator in the seat) or closed (operator in the seat).
      • If the operator is in the seat, pressing the switch will lower the squeegee and switch on the vacuum motors. When the machine is moved into reverse, the squeegee will be raised, then lowered when the machine is again moved forward. This mode is used to pickup water from the floor without scrubbing or adding solution.
      • If the operator is not in the seat, pressing the switch will toggle the vacuum motors on and off to allow use of the vacuum wand. In this mode, the squeegee will not move up or down and the recovery tank full indicator is ignored.
  • Scrub Speed Switch – When the machine is operating in any one of its scrub settings, the machine’s travel speed is reduced to 80 percent of the maximum transport speed pre-programmed into the speed controller. Pressing the Scrub Speed Switch overrides the 80 percent of transport speed limit and increases the scrub speed to 100 percent of transport speed.
  • Traction Control Switch – regulates the drive wheel motor torque to minimize drive wheel slippage in limited traction conditions.
  • Side Broom On/Down Switch – lowers and raises the side brooms (only functional on cylindrical models equipped with side brooms). Note that when the scrub system is switched on, the side brooms are lowered to the same position they were in when the scrub system was last turned off (auto memory operating position).

    Note: You can raise or lower the side broom height to maintain the correct broom contact patterns and compensate for normal broom wear. Refer to the Sweep System, Side Broom section for instructions on setting the side broom height.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍‍​​​‍‍​​‍‍⁠⁠⁠‌​‌⁠⁠

  • Burst of Power Button – The Burst of Power Button functions differently depending on whether the EcoFlex™ mode is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2. (Also refer to the Control System/Main Programming Options/EcoFlex™ Mode Selection section, page 40.) Note that in Mode 1 the detergent concentration is displayed as a ratio. In Mode 2 the detergent concentration is displayed as a percent.
    • In EcoFlex™ Mode 1, the minimum detergent concentration is displayed as a ratio. Pressing the Burst of Power Button in Mode 1 will do the following:
      • The detergent ratio will change to the maximum concentration programmed ratio. (Also refer to the Solution System/Maintenance and Adjustments/To Program the Detergent Ratio section.)
      • The scrub pressure will increase to the next highest pressure.
      • The solution flow rate will increase to the next highest level.

      After 60 seconds, or after you press the Burst of Power Button again, the detergent ratio will revert to the minimum concentration ratio, and the scrub pressure and solution rate will return to their previous settings.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 23, used with permission. SES ref PF-26PE-TJHO‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍‍​​​‍‍​​‍‍⁠⁠⁠‌​‌⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 23 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  • In EcoFlex™ Mode 2, the minimum detergent concentration is displayed as a percent.. Pressing the Burst of Power Button in Mode 2 will do the following:
    • The detergent ratio will change to the maximum concentration programmed percentage. (Also refer to the Solution System/Maintenance and Adjustments/To Program the Detergent Ratio section.)
    • The scrub pressure will increase to the next highest pressure.
    • The solution flow rate will increase to the next highest level.

    After 60 seconds, or after you press the EcoFlex™ Button again, the detergent ratio will revert to the programmed ratio, and the scrub pressure and solution rate will return to their previous settings.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​‌‌‍⁠​​‍‌⁠​⁠‍​​‍‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠

  • Horn Button – sounds the horn when pressed.
  • Control Panel Display – displays the various icons that indicate scrub pressure, solution flow rate, detergent ratio, battery charge state and a recovery tank full condition. The display also shows any error conditions detected by the main control board.

Control panel indicators

In general the following guidelines apply to the control panel indicators:

  • When the key switch is first turned on all of the blue or green control panel indicator lights will turn on for one second for an operational test.
  • A light indicator means that a system is on and running, or has been enabled and is ready to switch on when the drive pedal is moved into forward or reverse.
  • The indicators will be off when the system is disabled or switched off.
Control panel with each indicator light labeled: Solution System Indicator, Detergent System Indicator, Vacuum/Wand Indicator, Maximum Scrub Speed Indicator, EcoFlex Indicator, Scrub Off Indicator, Scrub On/Scrub Mode Select Indicators, Side Broom On/Down Indicator and Traction Control Indicator
Control panel indicators
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 24, used with permission. SES ref PF-QT6L-UTHP‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​‌‌‍⁠​​‍‌⁠​⁠‍​​‍‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 24 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  • Scrub On/Scrub Mode Select Indicator:
    • The left side indicator will light when the normal scrub mode is selected.
    • The right side indicator will light when the heavy scrub mode is selected.
    • Both the right and left indictors will light when the extreme scrub mode is selected.
    • Both the right and left indictors will be off when the scrub system is off.
  • Scrub Off Indicator:
    • The indicator will light to indicate that the scrub system is off and is ready to be activated.
    • The indicator will be off when the scrub system is enabled and/or switched on.
  • Solution System Indicator:
    • The indicator will light when the solution system is enabled and/or is switched on.
    • The indicator will be off when the solution system is off.
    • The indicator will flash when the solution tank (liquid level) float switch senses a low solution level.
  • Detergent System Indicator:
    • The indicator will light when the detergent system is enabled and/or is switched on.
    • The indicator will be off when the detergent system is off.

    Note: The control board automatically recognizes that the machine has an operational detergent system through its wiring harness connection.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍‌​‍‌‌⁠​‌‍⁠​‌⁠​​‍

  • Vacuum/Wand Indicator:
    • The indicator will light when the vacuum system is enabled and/or is switched on.
    • The indicator will be off when the vacuum system is off.
    • The indicator will flash when the vacuum system is operating in the time delay shutdown mode (normally five to 10 seconds).
  • Maximum Scrub Speed Indicator:
    • The indicator will light when the maximum 100% transport speed during scrubbing is enabled.
    • The indicator will be off when normal scrub speed is enabled.
  • Traction Control Indicator:
    • The indicator will light when the traction control mode is enabled.
    • The indicator will be off when the traction control mode is disabled.
  • Side Broom On/Down Indicator:
    • The indicator will be on when the side brooms are in the down working position, enabled and switched on.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 25, used with permission. SES ref PF-BX2C-BOS3‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍‌​‍‌‌⁠​‌‍⁠​‌⁠​​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 25 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  • The indicator will be off when the scrub system is switched off and the brooms are in the raised position.
  • EcoFlex Indicator:
    • The (green) indicator will be on when the EcoFlex™ low-concentration detergent mode is enabled.
    • The (green) indicator will flash when the EcoFlex™ burst of power mode is enabled.
    • The (green) indicator will be off when the EcoFlex™ full-concentration detergent mode is enabled.

Note: When the recovery tank becomes full (when in the auto scrub mode), the vacuum motors and all other systems shut off except the drive motor. The LCD on the dash panel will display the full tank icon.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‍‍‍‍‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​‍‍​​⁠​⁠⁠​‌

Control panel display

In short The display shows the hour meter, battery charge, solution flow rate and scrub pressure, plus the detergent ratio when the detergent system is enabled. If the control board finds an error it shows a wrench icon and a two-digit code, and it steps through the codes at one-second intervals if there is more than one.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‍‍‍‍‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​‍‍​​⁠​⁠⁠​‌

The control panel display is a liquid crystal display (LCD) that shows the hour meter, battery charge indicator, solution flow rate and scrub pressure. If the detergent system is enabled, the display will also show the detergent system indicator and the current detergent/solution ratio.

If an A2 Control Board error occurs, the display will show a wrench icon to indicate an error, and display a two-digit error code number. If more than one error exists, the display will sequence through the error codes at one-second intervals. (Refer to the Control System section for a list of the A2 Control Board error codes.)

Control panel display with callouts: Hour Meter, Detergent System Indicator, Battery Indicator, Error Indicator (wrench icon), Error Code Number (example shown: 29), Regular, Heavy and Extreme Solution Flow bars, and Normal, Heavy and Extreme Scrub Pressure bars
Control panel display

Caution displays

If the recovery tank is full, the display will show a caution symbol and the tank full icon.

Display showing a caution triangle with exclamation mark next to the recovery tank full icon
Recovery tank full caution display

If the battery charge level falls to a critical level, the display will show a caution symbol and the battery-low icon.

Display showing a caution triangle with exclamation mark next to the battery-low icon
Battery low caution display
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 26, used with permission. SES ref PF-L5CW-NHL5‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‍‍‍‍‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​‍‍​​⁠​⁠⁠​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 26 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Circuit breakers

The machine circuit breakers are located on the panel to the left of the Operator seat.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‍‌‌‍​​​​⁠​‍‍‌‌⁠

Photo of the circuit breaker panel to the left of the operator seat, showing three breaker buttons labeled F1, F2 and F3
Circuit breaker panel

General maintenance

Maintenance after use

In short After scrubbing, press the Scrub Off Switch, then drive to a service area, drain and rinse the solution tank and the recovery tank, and inspect the drain hoses and vacuum hose. The brushes or pads, the squeegee and (on cylindrical systems) the hopper are then removed and cleaned, as the steps here and on page 28 describe.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‍‌‌‍​​​​⁠​‍‍‌‌⁠
  1. When finished scrubbing, press the Scrub Off Switch. This will automatically raise the scrub deck and squeegee, and switch off the solution, detergent and vacuum systems.
  2. Drive the machine to a service area for daily maintenance, and check the machine for any additional maintenance or service that may be needed.
  3. To empty and clean the solution tank:
    1. a. Remove the Solution Tank Drain Hose from its storage clamp.
    2. b. Direct the Solution Tank Drain Hose to a designated disposal site and remove the Solution Tank Drain Hose Plug.
    3. c. Rinse the tank with clean water.
  4. To empty and clean the recovery tank:
    1. a. Pull the Recovery Tank Drain Hose from its storage area.
    2. b. Direct the Recovery Tank Drain Hose to a designated disposal site and remove the Recovery Tank Drain Hose Plug. (Hold the end of the Recovery Tank Drain Hose above the water level in the tank to avoid sudden, uncontrolled wastewater flow.) The Recovery Tank Drain Hose can be squeezed to regulate the flow.
    3. c. Rinse the recovery tank with clean water.
Machine drawing with callouts for the Recovery Tank Drain Hose Plug, Recovery Tank Drain Hose, Hopper, Solution Tank Drain Hose, Solution Tank Drain Hose Plug and Vacuum Hose
Tank drain hoses, plugs, hopper and vacuum hose
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 27, used with permission. SES ref PF-EVE4-KTPN‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‍‌‌‍​​​​⁠​‍‍‌‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 27 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
    1. d. Inspect the Solution Tank Drain Hose, Recovery Tank Drain Hose and Vacuum Hose for wear or damage. Replace the if kinked or damaged.
  1. Remove the brushes or pad holders. Rinse the brushes or pads in warm water and hang up to dry.
  2. Remove the squeegee, rinse it with warm water, then reinstall.
  3. Remove the Hopper on cylindrical systems and clean thoroughly. You can remove the Hopper from either side of the machine by removing the side skirt, tilting the Hopper up and away from housing, then pulling the Hopper out.
  4. Check the following maintenance schedule and perform any required maintenance before you store the machine.

Maintenance schedule

Maintenance ItemDailyWeeklyMonthlyYearly
Charge BatteriesX
Check/Clean Tanks and HosesX
Check/Clean/Rotate the Brushes/PadsX
Check/Clean the SqueegeeX
Check/Clean Vacuum Shutoff FloatX
Check/Clean the Vacuum Motor Foam Filter(s)X
Clean Hopper on Cylindrical SystemX
Check the Water Level in each Battery CellX
Inspect Scrub Housing SkirtsX
Inspect and Clean Solution FilterX
Check Foot/Parking Brake For Wear and AdjustmentX
Clean Solution Dispensing Trough on Cylindrical SystemX
Purge Detergent SystemX
Side Broom MaintenanceX
Lubrication - Grease FittingsX
* Check Carbon BrushesX

* Inspect the vacuum motor carbon brushes every 300 operating hours. Check the brush and drive motor carbon brushes every 500 operating hours.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‌​‍‍​‌‍‍‍⁠‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠

Note: Refer to the individual machine sections in this manual for more detail on maintenance and service repairs.

  1. Store the machine indoors in a clean, dry place. Keep the machine from freezing. Leave the tanks open to air them out.
  2. Turn the key switch off (O) and remove the key.
CAUTION! Do not pressure-wash the operator control panel, circuit breaker panel or any electrical areas of the machine.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 28, used with permission. SES ref PF-JH7X-2DBY‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‌​‍‍​‌‍‍‍⁠‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 28 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Machine lubrication

In short Once a month, pump a small amount of grease into each grease fitting until grease seeps out around the bearings, and apply light machine oil to the components shown on the Lubrication Points drawing.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍​​​⁠​​‍‌‌⁠‌‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠⁠‍‍

Once a month:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍​​​⁠​​‍‌‌⁠‌‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠⁠‍‍

  • Pump a small amount of grease into each grease fitting on the machine as shown until grease seeps out around the bearings.
  • Apply light machine oil to the components shown.

Apply grease to:

  • Squeegee Caster Wheel Axle and Pivot
  • Steering Wheel Shaft Universal joint
  • Steering Chain
  • Squeegee mount angle adjustment knob threads

Apply light machine oil to:

  • Squeegee tool end wheels
  • Recovery Tank release latch
  • Brake Pedal (parking brake) linkage
Lubrication points drawing of the machine with enlarged detail views, each labeled Grease, Oil, or Grease or Anti-seize
Lubrication points

The Lubrication Points drawing carries these labels: Grease (four places), Oil (three places) and Grease or Anti-seize (two places).

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 29, used with permission. SES ref PF-BU6U-DIDS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍​​​⁠​​‍‌‌⁠‌‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠⁠‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 29 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

PM check list - SC6500

In short This is a printable preventive-maintenance form for the SC6500. Items 1 to 17 here are operational checks and items 18 to 44 on page 31 are visual checks, each marked OK, with a defect code (or the note printed in the row), or Does Not Work. The defect codes A to W are listed below.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‍⁠‍‌‌​‌‍‌⁠​⁠​​‌​​​‌‌⁠

Form fields: Customer, Address, City, ST, Zip, Model, Serial, Hours (blank lines to fill in).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‍⁠‍‌‌​‌‍‌⁠​⁠​​‌​​​‌‌⁠

Defect Code
Aneeds adjustment
Bbinding
Cdirty or contaminated
Ddamaged, bent or torn
Lleaks
Mmissing
Wworn out
RefOperational Inspection ItemsOKDefect Codes (Circle)Does Not Work
1SteeringA B W
2Drive Pedal Operation (check for Fwd/Rev drive and any neutral creep)A B D
3Seat Safety Switch (when operator stands up machine is to stop)A D
4Brakes (service and parking)A B W
5Drive System Performance (reference Service Manual for Curtis drive programmer speed changes)noisy sluggish
6Scrub System (Raise/Lower and auto scrubbing functions)A B
7Scrub Brush Pressure Settings (see Service Manual programming, 3 different modes)A B
8Squeegee System (Raise/Lower and auto lift in reverse function)A B
9Vacuum Performance (sealed water lift 70” and 1-inch open hole adapter 15 inches)C L W
10Solution Control (On/Off and flow volume Min/Max)A B L
11Solution Control (On/Off and flow volume Min/Max)B D
12Emergency Battery Disconnect Control LeverA B D
13Side broom Sweep System, Raise/Lower and auto sweep functions (cylindrical only)A B D
14Tilt Steering Mechanism and SeatD
15Main Control Board Special Program Options (check all applicable program settings); Example, Fault Recall Mode, etc.Program as needed
16Battery Charger OperationD
17Chemical Detergent System FunctionsC L
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 30, used with permission. SES ref PF-O2XW-HOZQ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‍⁠‍‌‌​‌‍‌⁠​⁠​​‌​​​‌‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 30 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
RefVisual Inspection ItemsCommentsOKDefect Codes (Circle)Does Not Work
18Scrub Brushes, check for wear and rotateA B D W
19Scrub Brush Motor(s) and disc machine gearboxesCarbon BrushesB L W
20Scrub Brush Drive Belt, wear (cylindrical only)1000 hours then every 500 hoursA D W
21Scrub Brush Deck Actuator MotorA B D W
22Brush Driver Plates (flex coupler and retainer clips) (disc only)D M
23Brush Idler Bearing Plate and Driver (cylindrical only)C W
24Scrub Deck SkirtsA B W
25Solution Solenoid ValveInspect PoppetC L
26Solution Tank, Delivery Hoses and FilterClean Filter ScreenC L
27Vacuum Motor Carbon BrushesWear Limit 3/8”W
28Vacuum Motor Cover Gasket and FiltersClean filter and screenL W
29Vacuum Float Ball and Cage AssemblyClean FloatC M
30Recovery Tank Cover GasketAir leaksC D L
31Recovery Tank Drain Hose and CapFlushC L
32Squeegee Pick-Up Tool and HoseBack flushC L
33Squeegee Blades (clean and rotate)A C D W
34Squeegee Mount Wheels (lubricate)4 Grease FittingsA C W
35Squeegee Lift Actuator Motor and Lifting BarA B D
36Battery Pack Condition (clean and water)Load TestC W
37Front Drive Wheel MotorCarbon BrushesC W
38Front Drive TireTread WearW
39Rear Brake Rotors and Disc WearAdjust Free PlayA B W
40Drive Pedal Linkage (neutral return)Hydroback SpringA B
41Steering Chain (lubricate and tension)1/4” DeflectionA B C
42Steering Column (knob and plunger spring) also Universal JointGreaseA D
43Rear WheelsTread and bearingsC W
44Sweep Debris Hopper (cylindrical only)RinseC

Work Completed By: ____________ Acknowledged By: ____________‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠‌​‍⁠‍⁠​⁠‌‍‌​‍⁠​⁠⁠‍⁠‍​

Date: ____________ Date: ____________

Corrected an obvious misprint: the column heading on page 31 is printed as “(Circult)” (now “Circle”, as on page 30).

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 31, used with permission. SES ref PF-RIXM-JDZQ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠‌​‍⁠‍⁠​⁠‌‍‌​‍⁠​⁠⁠‍⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 31 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Chassis system

Major chassis components

Exploded view of the chassis: frame weldment with side panels, a tubular hoop, brackets and fasteners. A part at the bottom is called out as 45 in / 48 in / 1300mm models only
Major chassis components

The part shown at the bottom of the drawing is for 45 in / 48 in / 1300mm models only.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠​‌‌​‌​​⁠⁠‌​‌​‌​⁠‍‌​⁠⁠

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 32, used with permission. SES ref PF-XC75-XE2W‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠​‌‌​‌​​⁠⁠‌​‌​‌​⁠‍‌​⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 32 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Control system

In short The control system is the A2 control board, the A3 switch/display panel and their sensors and circuitry. The A2 board keeps scrub pressure steady by watching brush motor current and moving the scrub deck with the lift actuator motor, and it shows or stores error codes for troubleshooting. See Main control programming options, starting on page 34.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌‍‌‌‌⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌‌⁠​‍‍‍

Functional description

Overview

The control system consists of the A2 Control Board Assembly, the A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly and associated sensors and circuitry.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌‍‌‌‌⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌‌⁠​‍‍‍

A2 control board assembly

The A2 Control Board Assembly, sometimes referred to the main controller, communicates with the Curtis A1 Speed Controller and the A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly to coordinate the operation of the various machine systems. The A2 Control Board Assembly is fastened to the Electrical Mount behind the electrical panel cover assembly to the left of the Operator seat.

Photo of the electrical compartment to the left of the operator seat with callouts for the A2 Control Board Assembly, the Electrical Mount and the Curtis A1 Speed Controller
A2 control board, electrical mount and speed controller

One primary function of the A2 Control Board Assembly is to position the scrub brushes relative to the floor surface using a lift actuator motor. The A2 Control Board Assembly continuously monitors the brush motor current draw to maintain the desired scrub pressure on the floor.

  • If the brush motor current drops below the desired range, the A2 Control Board Assembly switches on the lift actuator motor to move the scrub deck downward until the brush motor current draw is within the correct range for the scrub pressure selected.
  • If the brush motor current rises above the desired range, the A2 Control Board Assembly switches on the lift actuator motor to lift the scrub deck upward until the brush motor current draw is again within the correct range for the scrub pressure selected.

Note: Refer to the Scrub System section in this manual for a complete explanation of scrub deck operation.

A secondary function of the A2 Control Board Assembly is to detect any system failures and display the corresponding error code on the display panel, or store it in the control board’s recall memory mode. The error codes are used to help service technicians determine the fault and to guide in repairing a specific system malfunction quickly.

Note: See the Troubleshooting section for further information.

The A2 Control Board Assembly also allows you to change program settings for a set of specific machine functions. See the Main Control Programming Options section in this manual for further information.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 33, used with permission. SES ref PF-QBIC-JWML‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌‍‌‌‌⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌‌⁠​‍‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 33 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

A3 switch/display panel assembly

The A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly is the user interface that includes the various system switches and buttons, and the control panel display. The A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly sends the operator inputs via a CAN BUS to the A2 Control Board Assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‌‌‌‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠​​‍‍​⁠​⁠

Photo of the A3 switch and display panel: horn button, solution, detergent and EcoFlex buttons, display window, red scrub off and green scrub on buttons, vacuum/wand, scrub speed, side broom and traction control buttons
A3 switch/display panel

Circuit description

The A2 Control Board Assembly is connected by several inputs to battery negative:

The A2 Control Board Assembly gets positive battery voltage from two inputs:

  • When the key switch, seat switch and battery interlock are closed, positive voltage is supplied to the A2 Control Board Assembly.
  • When the key switch is closed, positive voltage is supplied to the coil side of contactor K5. When K5 contacts close, positive voltage is supplied to the A2 Control Board Assembly.

The A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly gets voltage from two outputs on the A2 Control Board Assembly. The A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly communicates with the A2 Control Board Assembly via a CAN BUS connection (CAN H and CAN L).

Main control programming options

In short Each procedure has you hold the named switch or switches while turning the key switch on, then follow its own steps. Most save with the Scrub Off switch, then turn the key switch off.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‌‌‌‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠​​‍‍​⁠​⁠

Fault recall mode

Whenever the A2 Control Board Assembly detects an electrical system error or fault, one or more error codes are displayed and stored by the A2 Control Board Assembly. You can recall error codes (if any) from previous machine operation for troubleshooting purposes, To recall stored error codes:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the solution switch.
  3. While holding the solution switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the solution switch until the solution system indicator turns on.
  5. Release the solution switch. The solution system indicator turns off and the scrub off indicator will light. The display will show a wrench icon indicating that you are in fault recall mode.
    • If there are no previous error codes stored, the display will show the no-fault wrench icon (a wrench with a short line through it) asking you to reset the machine (no fault). Skip to step 7.
    • If error codes have been stored, the display will show the wrench icon and error number(s) next to the wrench. If more than one error code is stored, the display will toggle through all the errors stored.
    • If you want to save the codes, skip to step 7.
    • To clear the stored error codes, press the scrub off switch. The display will now show key switch icon asking you to reset the machine.
  6. To exit the fault recall mode, turn the key switch off.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 34, used with permission. SES ref PF-BRSF-MT6T‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‌‌‌‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠​​‍‍​⁠​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 34 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

To select the battery used in the machine

Note that the factory default is Standard (LVC = 31V)‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​‍‌⁠‍‌‌‍⁠‌‍​‍‍⁠⁠‍‌‌‌‌

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub off switch.
  3. While holding the scrub off switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the scrub off switch until the Scrub Off LED indicator turns on.
  5. Release the switch. The display will now show BATTERY.
  6. Press the scrub on switch to select the type of battery that is in the machine.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the new setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

To restore the scrub pressures to the factory default settings

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub on switch.
  3. While holding the scrub on switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the scrub on switch until the display shows key switch icon. The factory default scrub pressures have now been restored.
  5. Turn the key switch off.

To enable/disable the fault detection

Note that the factory default for fault detection is OFF.

You can enable or disable “open circuit” fault detection with this setting. If the setting is set to “off” the controller will still detect and set faults for over current conditions.

To turn the fault checking on or off:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold both the scrub off switch and solution switch.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold both switches until both switch indicators turn on. The display will show a wrench icon indicating fault detection mode.
  5. Release both switches. The solution system indictor light will blink and the scrub off indicator will stay on.
  6. Press the solution switch to toggle the fault detection between enabled/on (wrench icon with no cross) or disabled/off (wrench icon with cross).
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the new setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 35, used with permission. SES ref PF-JE3E-RTDB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​‍‌⁠‍‌‌‍⁠‌‍​‍‍⁠⁠‍‌‌‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 35 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

To display the control board revision level

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold both the scrub off switch and traction control switch.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold both switches until the scrub off and traction control indicators light.
  5. Release both switches. The scrub off and traction control indicators will switch off. The display will show the MAIN REVISION of the A2 control board assembly, the DISPLAY REVISION of the A3 switch/display panel assembly and the key switch icon.
  6. Turn the key switch off.

Monitor mode

The control system allows the five machine settings listed below to be quickly checked in the monitor mode to view the machine’s specific setup. To enter the monitor mode and view the current machine settings:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍⁠​‍⁠‍​‍​‌​⁠​​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠⁠

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the detergent switch.
  3. While holding the detergent switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the detergent switch until the detergent system indicator switches on.
  5. Release the detergent switch. The display will show the following current machine programmed settings:
    • Scrub deck type and size,
    • Detergent mode on/off,
    • Fault detection on/off,
    • Vacuum motor selection – VACUUM–SINGLE (one motor) or VACUUM–DUAL (two motors).
  6. To exit the monitor mode, turn the key switch off.
Monitor mode display (green LCD): 40 inch deck size, three small status icons including a wrench, and the text VACUUM-SINGLE
Monitor mode display example

Scrub deck down time adjustment

Note that the factory default deck down time is two seconds.

When scrub on switch is pressed, the control board will automatically lower the deck for two seconds. The time that the deck is lowered is adjustable from one second to three seconds in 0.1-second increments.

To adjust the scrub deck down time:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub on and solution switches.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold both switches until both switch indicators turn on.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 36, used with permission. SES ref PF-32DD-MH4S‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍⁠​‍⁠‍​‍​‌​⁠​​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 36 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Release both switches. The display will now show a clock icon in the upper left corner with a number indicating the scrub deck down time period.
  2. Press the scrub on switch to increment the time period. Each press of the switch increments the scrub deck down time 0.1 seconds. For example, the time will increment from 2.0 seconds to 2.1 seconds, and so on. The deck down times range from 1.0 to 3.0 seconds.
  3. Press the scrub off switch to save the new setting and display the key switch icon.
  4. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

Normal (light) scrub setting adjustment

In short The normal, heavy and extreme scrub settings each have their own scrub pressure, solution flow rate and detergent concentration that can be reprogrammed. The factory defaults for normal are one bar of pressure and one bar of flow (this page); heavy is two bars and two bars, and extreme is three bars and three bars (page 38).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‍‌​‌⁠⁠‍‌‍​‌⁠​‌‍​‍

Note that the factory default settings for the normal scrub setting are: Scrub pressure – one bar, Solution flow rate – one bar.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‍‌​‌⁠⁠‍‌‍​‌⁠​‌‍​‍

The scrub pressure and solution flow rate for the normal scrub setting can be programmed to better suit a particular application. This allows you to select a higher solution flow rate with normal scrub pressure, or a normal solution rate with heavier scrub pressure, etc., as the normal scrub setting. To change the normal scrub settings:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub on and scrub speed switches.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold both switches until the scrub speed indicator turns on and the normal scrub on indicator blinks.
  5. Release both switches. The display will now show a scrub icon (either disc or cylindrical) with the current scrub pressure setting.
  6. Press the scrub on switch to increment the scrub pressure setting as shown by the number of bars in the display.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the new scrub pressure setting and move to the solution flow rate setting. The display will now show the solution icon with gauge. The normal scrub indicator will stop blinking and the solution system indicator will blink.
  8. Press the solution switch to increment the solution flow rate as shown by the number of bars in the display.
  9. Press the scrub off switch to save the new solution flow rate setting and move to the detergent concentration setting. The display will now show the detergent icon with a 0, + or – next to it. The solution system indicator will stop blinking and the detergent indicator will blink.
  10. Press the detergent switch to scroll through and select the 0, + or – character in the display.
    • Selecting 0 will not change the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios.
    • Selecting + will increase the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios by 10 percent.
    • Selecting – will decrease the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios by 10 percent.
  11. Press the scrub off switch to save the detergent concentration setting and display the key switch icon.
  12. Turn the key switch off. The new settings will be saved until changed again.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 37, used with permission. SES ref PF-DQO4-MYAB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‍‌​‌⁠⁠‍‌‍​‌⁠​‌‍​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 37 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Heavy scrub setting adjustment

Note that the factory default settings for the heavy scrub setting are: Scrub pressure – two bars, Solution flow rate – two bars.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌‍​‌‍‍⁠​‌‌​‍‌⁠​⁠‍​⁠‍​‌

The scrub pressure and solution flow rate for the heavy scrub setting can be programmed to better suit a particular application. This allows you to select a higher solution rate with heavy scrub pressure, or a normal solution rate with heavy scrub pressure, etc., as the heavy scrub setting. To change the heavy scrub settings:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub on and detergent switches.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold both switches until the detergent indicator turns on and the heavy scrub indicator blinks.
  5. Release both switches. The display will now show a scrub icon (either disc or cylindrical) with the current scrub pressure setting.
  6. Press the scrub on switch to increment the scrub pressure setting as shown by the number of bars in the display.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the new scrub pressure setting and move to the solution flow rate setting. The display will now show the solution icon with gauge. The solution system indicator will blink.
  8. Press the solution switch to increment the solution flow rate as shown by the number of bars in the display.
  9. Press the scrub off switch to save the new solution flow rate setting and move to the detergent concentration setting. The display will now show the detergent icon with a 0, + or – next to it. The solution system indicator will stop blinking and the detergent indicator will blink.
  10. Press the detergent switch to scroll through and select the 0, + or – character in the display.
    • Selecting 0 will not change the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios.
    • Selecting + will increase the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios by 10 percent.
    • Selecting – will decrease the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios by 10 percent.
  11. Press the scrub off switch to save the detergent concentration setting and display the key switch icon.
  12. Turn the key switch off. The new settings will be saved until changed again.

Extreme scrub setting adjustment

Note that the factory default settings for the extreme scrub setting are: Scrub pressure – three bars, Solution flow rate – three bars.

The scrub pressure and solution flow rate for the extreme scrub setting can be programmed to better suit a particular application. This allows you to select a higher solution rate with extreme scrub pressure, or a normal solution rate with extreme scrub pressure, etc., as the extreme scrub setting. To change the extreme scrub settings:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub on and vacuum/wand switches.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 38, used with permission. SES ref PF-4IIM-OBUS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌‍​‌‍‍⁠​‌‌​‍‌⁠​⁠‍​⁠‍​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 38 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  2. Continue to hold both switches until the vacuum/wand indicator turns on, and the normal and heavy scrub indicators blink.
  3. Release both switches. The display will now show a scrub icon (either disc or cylindrical) with the current scrub pressure setting.
  4. Press the scrub on switch to increment the scrub pressure setting as shown by the number of bars in the display.
  5. Press the scrub off switch to save the new setting and move to the solution flow rate setting. The display will now show the solution icon with gauge. The normal and heavy scrub indicators will stop blinking and the solution indicator will blink.
  6. Press the solution switch to increment the solution flow rate as shown by the number of bars in the display.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the new solution flow rate setting and move to the detergent concentration setting. The display will now show the detergent icon with a 0, + or – next to it. The solution system indicator will stop blinking and the detergent indicator will blink.
  8. Press the detergent switch to scroll through and select the 0, + or – character in the display.
    • Selecting 0 will not change the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios.
    • Selecting + will increase the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios by 10 percent.
    • Selecting – will decrease the detergent concentration in the detergent ratios by 10 percent.
  9. Press the scrub off switch to save the detergent concentration setting and display the key switch icon.
  10. Turn the key switch off. The new settings will be saved until changed again.

Scrub speed switch lockout

Note that the factory default setting for the scrub speed switch is FAST/SLOW - ENABLE.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‌‍​‍​‌‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‌‌‌⁠​‍⁠‍‌

The control system is programmed to limit the maximum travel speed while scrubbing to a value less than that allowed when driving and not scrubbing. Pressing the scrub speed switch on the control panel will override this speed limiting feature and allow scrubbing at a the higher speed. If you wish to prevent scrubbing at this faster speed, you can disable the scrub speed switch override feature. To disable the scrub speed switch override feature:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub speed switch.
  3. While holding the scrub speed switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the scrub speed switch until the scrub speed and scrub off indicators both turn on.
  5. Release the scrub speed switch. The scrub speed indictor light will blink.
  6. Press the scrub speed switch to enable or disable the scrub speed switch override feature. FAST/SLOW - ENABLE means that the high-speed scrub feature is turned on. FAST/SLOW - DISABLE means that the high-speed scrub feature is turned off.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 39, used with permission. SES ref PF-GP4T-UQE4‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‌‍​‍​‌‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‌‌‌⁠​‍⁠‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 39 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Detergent system selection mode

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub off switch and the detergent switch.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold both switches until both switch indicators turn on.
  5. Release both switches. The scrub off indicator will stay lit and the detergent system indicator will blink. The display will now show a detergent bottle in the upper left corner indicating the detergent selection mode.
  6. Press the detergent switch to select between a normal detergent bottle icon indicating that the detergent system is activated, or a detergent bottle with a cross through it indicating that the detergent system is not activated.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the new setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

EcoFlex™ mode selection

Note that the factory default setting for the EcoFlex™ Mode is OFF.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍​⁠‌⁠⁠‍​‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​‌‌‌​⁠​‍

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the EcoFlex™ button.
  3. While holding the button, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the button for two seconds until the EcoFlex™ and scrub off indicators turn on.
  5. Release the EcoFlex™ button. The display will now show the ECOFLEX MODE/OFF, ECOFLEX MODE/MODE 1 and ECOFLEX MODE/MODE 2 menu.
  6. Press the EcoFlex™ button to scroll through the menu and select the desired ECOFLEX MODE. On the SC6500, there is no difference in machine operation whether Mode 1 or Mode 2 is selected.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.
Display menu with three entries: ECOFLEX MODE OFF, ECOFLEX MODE MODE 1 and ECOFLEX MODE MODE 2
EcoFlex mode menu

Vacuum motor configuration option

Note that the factory default setting for the vacuum motor configuration is SINGLE (one vacuum motor).

All rider scrubber models covered in this manual can be equipped with optional dual vacuum motors. The A2 control board assembly must be programmed for the number of vacuum motors installed so that the current overload protection will function correctly. To select the vacuum motor configuration:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub system off and vacuum/wand switches.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on until the scrub off and vacuum/wand indicators light.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 40, used with permission. SES ref PF-RJOU-2QI3‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍​⁠‌⁠⁠‍​‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​‌‌‌​⁠​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 40 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Release both switches. The vacuum/wand indictor will flash. The control panel display will now indicate the vacuum motor setting.
  2. Press the vacuum/wand switch to toggle between VACUUM - SINGLE for a single vacuum motor or VACUUM - DUAL for two vacuum motors.
  3. Press the scrub off switch to save the setting and display the key switch icon.
  4. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

Recovery tank full detection enable/disable

Note that the factory default setting for the recovery tank full detection is ENABLE.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍‌‌​⁠​‌⁠‌‌​‍⁠​​‍⁠​‌‌⁠​

The SC6500 is equipped with a feature that will automatically shut off the vacuum and scrub systems and display a recovery tank full icon on the control panel display when the recovery tank becomes full. If problems are encountered with the vacuum shutoff feature, such as the vacuum shutting off even when the recovery tank is not full, this feature can be turned off. To turn this feature on (enable) or off (disable):

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the vacuum/wand switch.
  3. While holding the vacuum/wand switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the vacuum/wand switch until the vacuum/wand indicator turns on.
  5. Release the vacuum/wand switch. The vacuum/wand indictor will blink and the scrub off indicator will turn on. The display will now show a text message REC TANK FULL DETECT/ENABLE or DISABLE.
  6. Press the vacuum/wand switch to toggle between ENABLE or DISABLE. ENABLE means that the automatic shutoff feature is turned on. DISABLE means that the automatic shutoff feature is turned off.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

Solution flow in reverse enable/disable

Note that the factory default setting for the solution flow in reverse option is ENABLE.

The solution flow is programmed to dispense solution when the machine backing up. To disable solution flow when the machine moves in reverse:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the EcoFlex™ button and the solution switch.
  3. While holding both the button and switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the button and switch until the solution system and vacuum/wand indicators turn on.
  5. Release the button and switch. The vacuum/wand indicator will turn off, the solution system indictor will blink and the scrub off indicator will turn on. The display will now show the message SOLUTION IN REVERSE/ENABLE or DISABLE.
  6. Press the solution switch to toggle between SOLUTION IN REVERSE ENABLE or DISABLE. If you select ENABLE, the solution flow will stay on when the machine is moving in reverse. If you select DISABLE, solution flow will stop when the machine is moving in reverse.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 41, used with permission. SES ref PF-E25D-AYNI‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍‌‌​⁠​‌⁠‌‌​‍⁠​​‍⁠​‌‌⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 41 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Press the scrub off switch to save the setting and display the key switch icon.
  2. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

Indicator LED intensity selection option

Note that the factory default setting for the indicator LED intensity is normal.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‍​‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌

To change the intensity of the LEDs in the control panel indicators.

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the vacuum/wand and scrub speed switches.
  3. While holding both switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold both switches until the vacuum/wand and scrub speed indicators turn on. The display will now show a light bulb icon in the upper left corner indicating the LED light intensity selection.
  5. Release both switches. The scrub speed and scrub off indicators will light and the vacuum/wand indicator will blink.
  6. Press the vacuum/wand switch to select between the normal intensity or extra bright intensity levels.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

Detergent and solution pump purge

In short There are two purge programs for the EcoFlex™ detergent system. Method 1 starts with the key switch off and runs the detergent and solution pumps for approximately 20 seconds; Method 2 starts with the key switch on and runs them for approximately 10 seconds.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‍​‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌

The EcoFlex™ detergent system has two purge (flush) programs to ensure that the detergent delivery hoses and related components are kept open and clean. A general operational description in how the system functions is found in the Solution System section. To activate the maintenance purge functions:

Method 1

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold both the detergent and solution switches.
  3. While holding the switches, turn the key switch on. The display will show the purge icon, the detergent and solution pumps will run for approximately 20 seconds, then the pumps will shut off.
  4. When the purge cycle is complete, turn the key switch off.

Method 2 (as described in the Instructions for Use)

  1. Turn the key switch on.
  2. Press and hold both the detergent and solution switches for three seconds. The detergent and solution pumps will run for approximately 10 seconds.
  3. When the purge cycle is complete, turn the key switch off.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 42, used with permission. SES ref PF-WBG4-GIQI‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‍​‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 42 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Side broom function

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the side broom on/down switch.
  3. While holding the switch, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the switch until the side broom on/down indicator turns on.
  5. Release the switch. The display will now show SIDE BROOM/ENABLE or DISABLE.
  6. Press the side broom on/down switch to toggle between SIDE BROOM ENABLE or SIDE BROOM DISABLE.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

Side broom height adjustment

The height of the side brooms is determined by the length of time the side broom actuator runs as it lowers the side brooms. Note that:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠⁠​‌‍‍​‍⁠​​​‍⁠​⁠‌​‌⁠⁠‌

  • Increasing the side broom actuator run time lowers the side broom height.
  • Decreasing the side broom actuator run time raises the side broom height.

To adjust the side broom height:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the side broom on/down and scrub off switches.
  3. While holding the switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the switches until the side broom on/down indicator, scrub off indicator and both scrub on indicators turn on.
  5. Release the switches. The indicators will stay on and the display will now show the side broom actuator down run time in seconds.
    • Press the scrub on switch to increase the side broom actuator run time and lower the position of side brooms.
    • Press the side broom on/down switch to decrease the side broom actuator run time and raise the position of side brooms.

    Note that the side broom actuator run times range from 1.0 to 3.0 seconds.

  6. Press the scrub off switch to save the side broom height. The actuator will raise the brooms to their up position and the display will show a key switch icon.
  7. Turn the key switch off. The machine is now reprogrammed to work with the new side broom height setting.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 43, used with permission. SES ref PF-D3FP-VCPY‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠⁠​‌‍‍​‍⁠​​​‍⁠​⁠‌​‌⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 43 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Display mode selection

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the detergent switch and EcoFlex™ button.
  3. While holding the detergent switch and EcoFlex™ button, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the button and switch for two seconds until the EcoFlex™ and detergent system indicators turn on.
  5. Release the button and switch. The EcoFlex™ indicator will blink and the display will show DISPLAY MODE.
  6. Press the EcoFlex™ button to toggle between 1. US DISPLAY and 2. GLOBAL DISPLAY.
  7. Press the scrub off switch to save the new setting and display the key switch icon.
  8. Turn the key switch off. The new setting will be saved until changed again.

Service test mode

In short Service test mode lets a technician control individual system components independent of the normal operator inputs. Enter it by holding the scrub speed and traction control switches while turning the key switch on, and exit by turning the key switch off.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍‌‍​‍⁠​⁠⁠‍​⁠‌⁠⁠‌⁠

The purpose of the service test mode is to assist the service technician with numerous quick shortcut troubleshooting procedures. The service test mode allows you to control individual system components independent of the normal machine operator inputs.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍‌‍​‍⁠​⁠⁠‍​⁠‌⁠⁠‌⁠

To enter the service test mode

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the scrub speed and traction control switches.
  3. While holding the scrub speed and traction control switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the scrub speed and traction control switches until the traction control indicator lights.
  5. Release the scrub speed and traction control switches. The scrub speed indicator will turn off and the display will show NEUTRAL/SC-NO FAULT (speed controller - no fault). The display, switch and indicator functions in the service test mode are described below.
  6. To exit the service test mode, turn the key switch off.

Service test mode display

  • Speed Control Status
    • This indicator will read SC–NO FAULT (speed controller - no fault) if the status signal from the speed control is normal.
    • If a speed control fault exists, this indicator will read SC-FAULT (speed control fault). Refer to the Wheel System, Traction section for details on these codes.
  • Speed Control Foot Throttle Status
    • The control panel display will read NEUTRAL when the operator foot pedal is at rest.
    • The control panel display will read FORWARD when the foot pedal is depressed in the forward direction to activate its forward drive mode functions.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 44, used with permission. SES ref PF-4UMP-4VUA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍‌‍​‍⁠​⁠⁠‍​⁠‌⁠⁠‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 44 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Control panel switch and button functions

  • The control panel display will read REVERSE when the operator foot pedal is depressed in the reverse direction to activate its reverse drive mode functions.
In shortThe Scrub ON/Pressure Select, Vacuum/Wand and Side Broom On/Down switches each work in four presses: the first lowers the attachment (the vacuum and side broom switches also start their motors), the second turns the indicator off, the third raises it, and the fourth turns the indicator off. The Scrub System Off, Solution and Detergent switches simply turn their outputs on and off (see page 46).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍​​⁠⁠​⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍‍
Scrub System Off switch icon: a red outlined button showing a raised scrub brush with an up arrow and a blue indicator light
Scrub System Off switch

Scrub System Off Switch – This switch controls the scrub brush motor(s). Pressing and releasing this switch will alternately turn the brush motor(s) on and off. The scrub off indicator provides the following status information:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍​​⁠⁠​⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍‍

  • Off - Brush motor output is off and there is no brush motor current sensed.
  • Steady Blue - Brush motor output is on and there is normal brush motor current sensed.
Scrub ON/Pressure Select switch icon: a green outlined button showing a scrub brush with a down arrow and two blue indicator lights
Scrub ON/Pressure Select switch

Scrub ON/Pressure Select Switch – This switch controls the scrub deck lift actuator as follows:

  • Pressing the switch the first time will switch on the actuator to lower the scrub deck. The normal scrub indicator (left blue LED) will light as the actuator is running. Once the deck reaches the down position, the normal scrub indicator will blink.
  • Pressing the switch a second time will switch off the normal scrub indicator.
  • Pressing the switch a third time will switch on the actuator to raise the scrub deck. The normal scrub indicator will light as the actuator is running. Once the deck reaches the up position, the normal scrub indicator will blink.
  • Pressing the switch a fourth time will switch off the normal scrub indicator.
Vacuum/Wand switch icon: a grey outlined button showing a vacuum hose wand and squeegee with a blue indicator light
Vacuum/Wand switch

Vacuum/Wand Switch – This switch controls the squeegee lift actuator and vacuum motor(s) as follows:

  • Pressing the switch the first time will switch on vacuum motor(s) and switch on the actuator to lower the squeegee. The vacuum/wand indicator will light as the actuator is running. Once the squeegee reaches the down position, the vacuum/wand indicator will blink.
  • Pressing the switch a second time will switch off the vacuum/wand indicator.
  • Pressing the switch a third time will switch off the vacuum motor(s) and switch on the actuator to raise the squeegee. The vacuum/wand indicator will light as the actuator is running. Once the squeegee reaches the up position, the vacuum/wand indicator will blink.
  • Pressing the switch a fourth time will switch off the vacuum/wand indicator.
Side Broom On/Down switch icon: a grey outlined button showing a side broom with up and down arrows and a blue indicator light
Side Broom On/Down switch

Side Broom On/Down Switch – This switch controls the side broom motors and side broom lift actuator as follows:

  • Pressing the switch the first time will switch on side broom motors and switch on the actuator to lower the side brooms. The side broom on/down indicator will light as the actuator is running. Once the side brooms reach the down position, the side broom on/down indicator will blink.
  • Pressing the switch a second time will switch off the side broom on/down indicator.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 45, used with permission. SES ref PF-JR5P-IK4K‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍​​⁠⁠​⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 45 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

  • Pressing the switch a third time will switch off the side broom motors and switch on the actuator to raise the side brooms. The side broom on/down indicator will light as the actuator is running. Once the side brooms reach the up position, the side broom on/down indicator will blink.
  • Pressing the switch a fourth time will switch off the side broom on/down indicator.
Solution switch icon: a grey outlined button showing a faucet with spray and a blue indicator light
Solution switch

Solution Switch – This switch controls the solution solenoid and solution control pump. Pressing and releasing this switch will alternately turn the solution solenoid and solution pump on and off. The solution system indicator provides the following status information:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​‍​​​‌‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‌​‌‌‌​‍‌⁠‍

  • Off – Solenoid and solution pump outputs are off.
  • Steady Blue – Solenoid and solution pump outputs are on.
Detergent switch icon: a grey outlined button showing a laboratory flask with a blue indicator light
Detergent switch

Detergent Switch – This switch controls the detergent pumps. Pressing and releasing this switch will alternately turn the detergent pumps on and off. The detergent system indicator provides the following status information:

  • Off – Detergent pump output is off.
  • Steady Blue – Detergent pump output is on.

Error indicator and error code display

In shortAny error the A2 board detects shows on the display as a wrench symbol followed by a two-digit code. If there is more than one error, the display steps through the codes one second apart. Look the code up in the tables starting on page 47.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​‍​​​‌‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‌​‌‌‌​‍‌⁠‍

Any error codes detected by A2 Control Board Assembly will be displayed on the control panel display as they occur. If more than one error exists, the display will sequence through the error codes at one-second intervals. The error will display as a mechanical wrench symbol followed by a two-digit code. For example, wrench symbol 29 as shown in the adjacent drawing would be an open vacuum motor error.

Control panel display close-up showing the wrench error indicator and the two-digit error code 29 on the display, above the full control panel
Error indicator and two-digit error code on the display
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 46, used with permission. SES ref PF-O7UT-JKLM‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​‍​​​‌‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‌​‌‌‌​‍‌⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 46 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Error codes

In shortLook up the two-digit code from the display in the tables on pages 47 to 52. Each row gives the fault and the checks to make. If you get stuck, call us at 800-440-6723.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​⁠​⁠‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠​‌‌‍​⁠‍​‍‍⁠
Display codeError/fault descriptionCorrection
01#

Scrub deck sense R2 resistor fault‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​⁠​⁠‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠​‌‌‍​⁠‍​‍‍⁠

A fault will occur if scrub deck sensor resistor is unplugged or damaged. Check the resistor wiring for an open and substitute a new resistor and test scrub deck for correct operation. Note that there are four different resistor values used on the different deck types. See the electrical diagram decal for the correct specification for the resistor to replace.

03#

Speed control fault

Observe the blue flashing light detergent indicator light, then refer to the Wheel Drive, Traction section to troubleshoot the drive system.

04#

Scrub motor overload

Note that some models use one, two or three scrub motors. Refer to the Specifications section for detailed load current values for the different decks.

  1. Check for binding in the rotation of the brushes and incorrect brush deck lift actuator operation.
  2. Check the negative supply cable at the brush motor for a wiring problem, and also the small BRN current sense wire in the harness and A2 pin J2-2.
  3. Check for a short circuit* in the brush motor or wiring. On cylindrical models check for excessive belt tension and the condition of the idler bearing.
05#

Left brush motor contactor coil overload

Contactor K4 is for the left motor on the three-motor decks. The nominal coil resistance is 94 ohms for all three motor contactors.

  1. Check for a K4 coil wiring problem or a short circuit* (wire colors VIO and GRA/RED).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
06#

Center brush motor contactor coil overload

Contactor K3 is for the center motor on three-motor decks. K3 is for the left motor on two-motor decks.

  1. Check for a K3 coil wiring problem or a short circuit* (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
07#

Right brush motor contactor coil overload

Contactor K2 is for the right motor on two- or three-motor decks. K2 is the only contactor on a single-motor decks.

  1. Check for a K2 coil wiring problem or a short circuit* (wire colors VIO & YEL/BLU).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
08#

Scrub deck actuator overload

  • Normal current load is 1-3 amps.
  • Max current load is 6 amps.
  • Max current with no load is 1.4 amps.
  1. Check for binding or a frozen brush lift linkage and excessive weight on the brush deck.
  2. Check for a short circuit* in the actuator motor and wiring. Repair or replace.

To test the actuator, disconnect the motor plug and attach the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and perform an amp draw test. Compare readings to the current load specifications.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 47, used with permission. SES ref PF-ELQD-MQCG‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​⁠​⁠‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠​‌‌‍​⁠‍​‍‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 47 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Error codes

Display codeError/fault descriptionCorrection
09#

Vacuum motor overload‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌‌‍‌‌‌‌⁠‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‍‍⁠‌

Normal current load for one motor is 16-20 amps. Normal current load for two motors is 32-40 amps.

  1. Check for debris in the vacuum motor(s).
  2. Check for worn carbon brushes - replace brushes.
  3. Defective motor bearings - repair or replace.
  4. Check for a short circuit* in the vacuum motor or wiring - repair or replace.
10#

K1 Vacuum motor contactor coil overload. The nominal coil resistance is 100 ohms.

  1. Check for a K1 coil wiring problem or short circuit* (wire colors VIO and BLU).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the coil resistance is below 80 ohms, replace the coil.
11#

Squeegee actuator overload

  • Normal current load is 1-2 amps.
  • Max current load is 6 amps.
  • Max current with no load is 1.4 amps.
  1. Check for binding or frozen squeegee lift linkage and excessive weight on the squeegee mount.
  2. Check for a short circuit* in the actuator motor and wiring. Repair or replace.

To test the actuator, disconnect the motor plug and attach the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and perform an amp draw test. Compare readings to the current load specifications.

12#

L1 Solution solenoid overload

The nominal coil resistance is 74 ohms.

  1. Check for a wiring problem or short circuit*.
  2. Check the coil resistance. Replace the solution solenoid if the coil resistance is lower than 58 ohms.
13#

Solution control pump overload

  • The normal current load is 0.8-1.8 amps.
  • A current load of 3.2 amps or over will generate code 13 pump motor overload.
  1. Check for short circuits* in the wiring and in the M12 pump motor.
  2. Disconnect the solution pump motor and run the machine to see if the wiring is shorted.
  3. Check the current draw and compare to the specifications. If the motor shows high current draw replace the motor.
16#

K6 Side broom motor contactor coil overload

The nominal coil resistance is 100 ohms.

  1. Check for a K6 coil wiring problem or short circuit* (wire colors VIO and BRN/BLK).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 80 ohms, replace the contactor.
17#

Side broom actuator overload

  • Normal current load is 1-2 amps.
  • Max current load is 6 amps.
  • Max current with no load is 1.4 amps.
  1. Check for binding or frozen side broom lift linkage and excessive weight on the lifting arms.
  2. Check for a short circuit* in the actuator motor and wiring. Repair or replace.

To test the actuator, disconnect the motor plug and attach the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and perform an amp draw test. Compare readings to the current load specifications.

18#

K5 Auxiliary contactor coil overload

The nominal coil resistance is 100 ohms.

  1. Check for a K5 coil wiring problem or short circuit* (wire colors YEL/BRN & BLK/ORN).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 80 ohms, replace the contactor.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 48, used with permission. SES ref PF-Y3ZJ-2YC7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌‌‍‌‌‌‌⁠‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‍‍⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 48 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Error codes

Display codeError/fault descriptionCorrection
19#

Back-up alarm overload‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠⁠‍​​​‌‍‌⁠‌‌​​‍​‌‍​‌⁠⁠

Specifications:

  • 5-15 VDC
  • Current load 100 ma
  1. Check for a back-up alarm wiring problem or short circuit* (wire colors: positive ORN/BRN; negative BLU/WHT).
  2. Disconnect the back-up alarm and test to see if the wiring is shorted. If not, replace the back-up alarm.
20#

Horn output fault

Current load spec. 1.2 amps

  1. The horn or horn wiring’s +36V power feed is shorted to ground (wire colors VIO and BLU/RED).
  2. Disconnect the horn and test to see if the wiring is shorted. If not, replace the horn.
21#

Scrub motor open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  2. Check for 36 volts at the scrub motor that is not running. If you get 0 Volts, replace the brush motor contactor.
22#

Left brush motor contactor coil open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the K4 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and GRA/RED).
  2. Test for 36V at the K4 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
23#

Left brush motor contactor coil short to ground

  1. Disconnect the K4 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and GRA/RED) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
24#

Center brush motor contactor coil open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the K3 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO).
  2. Test for 36V at the K3 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
25#

Center brush motor contactor coil short to ground

  1. Disconnect the K3 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
26#

Right brush motor contactor coil open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the K2 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/BLU).
  2. Test for 36V at the K2 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 49, used with permission. SES ref PF-V3W6-RL6E‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠⁠‍​​​‌‍‌⁠‌‌​​‍​‌‍​‌⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 49 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Error codes

Display codeError/fault descriptionCorrection
27#

Right brush motor contactor coil short to ground‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍​‍⁠‍​⁠‍​​‌‍‍‍‍⁠‍​​‌​

  1. Disconnect the K2 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/BLU) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
28#

Scrub deck actuator open

  1. Check for disconnected lift actuator wiring.
  2. Check for an open circuit in the motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  3. Check for output voltage from the A2 control board assembly at the actuator wiring plug. It should be 36 volts. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
29#

Vacuum motor open

  1. Check for disconnected vacuum motor wiring.
  2. Check for an open circuit in the vacuum motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  3. Check for 36 Volts at the vacuum motor. If 0 Volts, replace the vacuum motor contactor K1.
30#

Vacuum motor contactor coil open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the K1 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and BLU).
  2. Test for 36V at the K1 coil. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
31#

K1 Vacuum motor contactor coil short to ground

  1. Disconnect the K1 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and BLU) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the motor contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
32#

Squeegee actuator open

  1. Check for disconnected squeegee actuator motor wiring or plug connection.
  2. Check for an open circuit in actuator motor wiring (WHT/GRN and BLU/BRN) or for a defective motor M3.
  3. Check for 36 Volts at the actuator motor. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
33#

L1 Solution solenoid open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the L1 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/GRN).
  2. Test for 36V at the L1 coil. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 50, used with permission. SES ref PF-QSHF-GC6C‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍​‍⁠‍​⁠‍​​‌‍‍‍‍⁠‍​​‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 50 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Error codes

Display codeError/fault descriptionCorrection
34#

L1 Solution solenoid short to ground‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍​​‌​⁠‍‍‌‌‌‌​​‌‍‌​‍⁠‌⁠

  1. Disconnect the L1 solenoid coil wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/GRN) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the solenoid valve.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
35#

Solution control pump open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the M12 pump motor and wiring (wire colors VIO and BLU/ORN).
  2. Test for 36V at the pump motor. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
36#

Side broom motor contactor coil open

  1. Check for open circuit in the K6 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and BRN/BLK).
  2. Test for 36V at the K6 coil. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
37#

K6 Side broom motor contactor coil short to ground

  1. Disconnect the K6 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and BRN/BLK) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the K6 contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
38#

Side broom actuator motor open

  1. Use an ohmmeter to check for an open circuit in the M4 side broom actuator and its wiring (wire colors GRA/VIO and GRN/ORN). If defective, repair or replace.
  2. Test for 36V at side broom actuator. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
39#

Auxiliary motor contactor coil open

  1. Check for an open circuit in the K5 coil and wiring (wire colors YEL/BRN and BLK/ORN).
  2. Test for 36V at the K5 coil. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
40#

K5 Auxiliary motor contactor coil short to ground

  1. Disconnect the K5 coil wiring (wire colors YEL/BRN and BLK/ORN) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the K5 contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 51, used with permission. SES ref PF-AWBX-UPQE‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍​​‌​⁠‍‍‌‌‌‌​​‌‍‌​‍⁠‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 51 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Error codes

Display codeError/fault descriptionCorrection
41#

Back-up alarm open‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌⁠​‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌‌‍​​‌‌‌​⁠‍​

  1. Use an ohmmeter to check for an open circuit in the H1 back-up alarm and its wiring (wire colors ORN/BRN and BLU/WHT). If defective, repair or replace.
  2. Test for 36V at the back-up alarm. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
42#

Back-up alarm short to ground

  1. The Back-up alarm and/or its +36V power feed is shorted to ground. Test the positive wire to ground for short circuit* (wire colors ORN/BRN battery + and BLU/WHT battery -). Repair or replace the defective wiring.
  2. Disconnect the alarm and test to see if the circuit wiring is still causing an error code (shorted). If not, replace the back-up alarm.

* Short Circuit definition:

  • A short circuit is a parallel path of very low resistance, often caused accidentally.
  • With low resistance there is an excessive amount of current.
  • The excessive current will either melt the wires or open a fusible link.

** See Service Test Mode in this manual for further troubleshooting information.

*** See the Main Control Programming Options section to activate the Brush Type Selection function.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 52, used with permission. SES ref PF-BGWT-HJBH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌⁠​‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌‌‍​​‌‌‌​⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 52 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

WARNING! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, disconnect the battery pack by pushing in the emergency-stop switch/battery disconnect, and make sure the parking brake is engaged.

A2 control board assembly

In shortThe A2 board comes out after you remove the electrical panel cover (unplug the fan first), disconnect its connectors and take out five screws. Install it by doing the same steps in reverse.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠‌‌‌‍​‍‌⁠​‍⁠​‍​​⁠​⁠​​
  1. Remove the electrical panel cover assembly (located to the left of the operator position). Make sure to unplug the fan assembly before removing the electrical panel cover assembly from the machine.
  2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the A2 Control Board Assembly.
  3. Remove the five screws holding the A2 Control Board Assembly to the Electrical Mount and remove the A2 Control Board Assembly from the machine.
  4. Install the A2 Control Board Assembly by following the above steps in reverse order.
Exploded view of the A2 control board assembly with five screws above the electrical mount plate, and the assembled electrical panel at lower left
A2 control board assembly removal
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 53, used with permission. SES ref PF-L5MT-IB6H‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠‌‌‌‍​‍‌⁠​‍⁠​‍​​⁠​⁠​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 53 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

In shortThe first table gives the current load in amps for each scrub mode on each deck type. The second gives solution flow in gallons per minute for each bar setting, with bars 4 and 5 as override rates.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌​‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌‌‍​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌‍‍
Scrub Pressure and Current Load (Amps) Specifications
Scrub ModeScrub Pressure IndicatorDeck Type
Disc 40”Cyl. 40”Disc 45”/48”Cyl. 45”/48”
Normal Scrub1 bar (#1)40 amps35 amps50 amps35 amps
Heavy Scrub2 bars (#2)50 amps45 amps60 amps45 amps
Extreme Scrub3 bars (#3)65 amps55 amps80 amps55 amps
Solution Flow Rates
DeckStandard flow ratesOverride flow rates
1 bar2 bars3 bars4 bars5 bars
40” Disc0.84 GPM1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.00 GPM2.50 GPM
40” Cylindrical0.70 GPM0.84 GPM1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.50 GPM
45”/48” Disc1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.00 GPM2.25 GPM2.50 GPM
45”/48” Cylindrical0.84 GPM1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.00 GPM2.50 GPM
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 54, used with permission. SES ref PF-VMHB-4ND2‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌​‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌‌‍​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 54 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

I/O table with shop measurements

A2 control board assembly

In shortThis table lists each pin on the A2 board’s J1 and J2 connectors (pages 55 to 58) with the signal, the nominal and acceptable values, and the reading measured on a machine. Read the comments column for how and when the value should change.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​‍‍‍⁠‍​‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍​‍​‍‍‍
DesignationPin IDWire ID/ ColorDescriptionSignal CharacteristicsNominal Value (when activated)Reference To:Acceptable RangeMeasuredComments
OutputJ1-1BLU/GRADetergent Pump2 (+)Pulsed Voltage0 or 36VB- (ground)see comment below *18-23VComplex pulsed PWM signal Measured in service test mode.
BidirectionalJ1-2BRN/BLUCAN-LDigital Communicationsee commentsee comment2.37VProtocol analyzer needed to verify connection
BidirectionalJ1-3GRN/BLUCAN-HDigital Communicationsee commentsee comment2.64VProtocol analyzer needed to verify connection
InputJ1-4ORN/REDSpeed Control - FaultVoltagesee commentB- (ground)see commentPulsed signal equal to the fault code flashed by the speed controllers built-in status LED
InputJ1-5GRNBattery +Voltage+36VB- (ground)31V - 38V36.7VDownstream of circuit breaker F1, Key switch S1, Diode D1, Seat Switch S2 and Battery Interlock Switch S3
OutputJ1-6TAN/BRNDetergent Pump1 (-)Pulsed Voltage0 or 36VB- (ground)see comment below *11-17VLine should alternate between 0V and 36V when detergent pump is activated. Measured in service test mode.
OutputJ1-7BLK/GRADetergent Pump1 (+)Pulsed Voltage0 or 36VB- (ground)see comment below *18-23VLine should alternate between 0V and 36V when detergent pump is activated
InputJ1-8ORNBattery +Voltage+36VB- (ground)31V - 38V37.46VDownstream of circuit breaker F1, switched through key switch S1
OutputJ1-9ORN/GRADetergent Pump2 (-)Pulsed Voltage0 or 36VB- (ground)see comment below *11-17VLine should alternate between 0V and 36V when detergent pump is activated. Measured in service test mode
InputJ1-10BLKBattery -Voltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V0.04VVacuum motor running
InputJ1-11RED/WHTSpeed Control - MotionVoltage0V (moving), 36V (not moving)B- (ground)0 - 1V (moving), 31 - 38V (not moving)

24.8V N‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​‍‍‍⁠‍​‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍​‍​‍‍‍

0.006V FWD or REV

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 55, used with permission. SES ref PF-OWMP-ZERG‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​‍‍‍⁠‍​‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍​‍​‍‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 55 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
DesignationPin IDWire ID/ ColorDescriptionSignal CharacteristicsNominal Value (when activated)Reference To:Acceptable RangeMeasuredComments
InputJ1-12YEL/REDSpeed Control - DirectionVoltage0V (reverse), 36V (forward)B- (ground)0 - 1V (reverse), 31 - 38V (forward)

33.4V N or FWD‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‍⁠‍‌​​‌⁠‍‌‍‍​⁠‍‍‍​​⁠‌

0.004V REV

OutputJ1-13GRAUI Panel - GroundVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V0.04VProvides ground to User Interface panel. Vacuum motor running.
InputJ1-14BLKBattery -Voltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V0.04VVacuum motor running.
InputJ1-15VIOBattery +Voltage36VB- (Ground)31V - 38V37.3VDownstream of circuit breaker F2, switched through contactor K5
OutputJ1-16WHT/VIOK3 Center Brush ContactorVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V

37.4V Off

0.11V On

OutputJ1-17GRA/REDK4 Left Brush ContactorVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1VNot measured. Should be same as J1-16 or J1-19
OutputJ1-18YEL/GRNL1 Solenoid ValvePulsed Voltage0 or 36VB- (ground)see comment

37.4V off

0.1V on

Line should alternate between 0V and 36V when solenoid is activated
OutputJ1-19YEL/BLUK2 Right Brush ContactorVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V

37.4V off

0.1v on

OutputJ1-20BLU/REDHorn (-)Voltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V

37.4V off

0.4V on

OutputJ1-21BLU/ORNSolution Pump (-)PWM0 or -36VB- (ground)see comment below **

37.4V off

32.06V on

Pulsed PWM signal. Switched ground return for pump.
OutputJ1-22WHT/BRNUI Panel - Power SupplyVoltage+8VB- (ground)7 - 9V7.98VProvides power to User Interface panel
InputJ1-23VIOBattery +Voltage36VB- (Ground)31V - 38V37.4VDownstream of circuit breaker F2, switched through contactor K5
OutputJ2-1WHT/GRNSqueegee Actuator +Voltage36VB- (ground)see comment

36.5V down

0.3V up

2.9V rest

+36V while lowering, -36V while raising
InputJ2-2BRNScrub Brush Motor ShuntVoltage.03 - .3VB- (ground).03 - .3V0.042VMeasured 48 inch cylindrical deck no load
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 56, used with permission. SES ref PF-LJAD-G42G‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‍⁠‍‌​​‌⁠‍‌‍‍​⁠‍‍‍​​⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 56 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
DesignationPin IDWire ID/ ColorDescriptionSignal CharacteristicsNominal Value (when activated)Reference To:Acceptable RangeMeasuredComments
InputJ2-3ORN/BLUVacuum Motor ShuntVoltage

.10V (Single Vac)‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‍⁠​⁠⁠​⁠​⁠‌‌‍⁠‌​​‌‍​​

.20V (Dual Vac)

B- (ground)

.07 - .12V (Single Vac. Motor)

.15 - .24V (Dual Vac. Motor)

0.136V Single Vac Motor running

Recovery Tank Full voltage = .083V (Single Vacuum Motor)

Recovery Tank Full voltage = .166V (Dual Vacuum Motor)

OutputJ2-4ORN/BLKBattery -Voltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V0.04VReturn path for Scrub Deck Resistor.Vacuum motor running.
OutputJ2-5YEL/GRABrush Actuator -Voltage36VB- (ground)see comment

0.4V down

37.1V up

2.9V rest

-36V while lowering, +36V while raising
OutputJ2-6RED/BLKBrush Actuator +Voltage36VB- (ground)see comment

37.1V down

0.4V up

2.9V rest

+36V while lowering, -36V while raising
OutputJ2-7GRN/ORNSide Broom Actuator -Voltage36VB- (ground)see comment

36.4V up

0.4V down

2.9V rest

-36V while lowering, +36V while raising
OutputJ2-8GRA/VIOSide Broom Actuator +Voltage36VB- (ground)see comment

36.8V down

4-1.4V up

2.8V rest

+36V while lowering, -36V while raising
OutputJ2-9BLU/BRNSqueegee Actuator -Voltage36VB- (ground)see comment

36.8V up

0.5v down

2.9V rest

-36V while lowering, +36V while raising
InputJ2-10BLKBattery -Voltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V0.04VVacuum motor running.
InputJ2-14BLKBattery -Voltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V0.04V
OutputJ2-15BRN/BLKSide Broom ContactorVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V

37.2V off

0.1V on

InputJ2-16GRN/WHTScrub Deck Sense ResistorVoltage1.78V, 2.5V, 3.0V, 3.57VB- (ground)

1.78V = 40” Disk

2.50V = 40” Cylindrical

3.0V = 45”/48” Disk

3.57V = 45”/48” Cylindrical

InputJ2-17VIO/YELSolution Empty SwitchVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V2.8vActive when tank is empty
OutputJ2-18ORN/BRNBackup Alarm (+)Voltage+15VB- (ground)14.9V
OutputJ2-19BLU/BLKSpeed Control - Mode Sel 1Voltage0 or 36VB- (ground)

18.6V

0.03V

Scrub on, speed increase off

Scrub on, speed increase on

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 57, used with permission. SES ref PF-KOVX-DHYG‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‍⁠​⁠⁠​⁠​⁠‌‌‍⁠‌​​‌‍​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 57 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
DesignationPin IDWire ID/ ColorDescriptionSignal CharacteristicsNominal Value (when activated)Reference To:Acceptable RangeMeasuredComments
OutputJ2-20BLK/WHTSpeed Control - Mode Sel 2Voltage0 or 36VB- (ground)

18.6V‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠⁠‌‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‌‍⁠‍​⁠⁠

0.03V

Traction on

Traction off

OutputJ2-21BLK/ORNAuxiliary ContactorVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V

37.4V key off

0.08v key on

OutputJ2-22BLUVacuum ContactorVoltage0VB- (ground)0 - 1V

37.4V off

0.13V on

OutputJ2-23BLU/WHTBackup Alarm (-)Voltage0VB- (ground)

12.6V off

0.1V on

* It is difficult to validate the signal using a voltmeter. An LED test light such as a logic probe is a better indicator.

** The Solution Pump (-) line provides a switched ground return for the pump. When the solution pump is on, a 5KHz signal with a varying duty cycle and a peak voltage of 36 volts will appear between this pin and B+. Measuring with a DC voltmeter will give a signal in the range of 6 to 27 volts. Changing the flow rate solution bars on the LCD should produce a relative increase or decrease of the meter reading.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 58, used with permission. SES ref PF-AGG3-3S7J‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠⁠‌‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‌‍⁠‍​⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 58 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Electrical system

The electrical system chapter contains information on the battery and electrical components which are foundational such as circuit protection, wiring harnesses and electrical items that do not have a more clear home in another chapter. For instance, see the solution system chapter for information on the solution solenoid.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌‌‍‌‍⁠⁠‌‌‌​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌​⁠

Functional description

Overview

This section includes information on battery installation and maintenance, a description of the low-voltage cut-out function, and descriptions of the battery condition displays.

  • For information on the A2 Control Board Assembly, refer to the Control System section.
  • For information on the A1 (Curtis) Speed Controller, refer to the Wheel System, Traction section.

Low-voltage cut-out feature

In shortWhen battery voltage drops below the cut-out level, the scrub system shuts down but the drive motor still runs so the machine can be driven to a charger. The standard lead-acid (wet cell) setting is 1.72 volts per cell and the alternate gel cell setting is 1.81 volts per cell. A 36-volt pack must climb back to at least 38.6 volts before scrub and solution work again.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌‌‍‌‍⁠⁠‌‌‌​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌​⁠

All models discussed in this manual are equipped with a low-voltage cutout feature to prevent over-discharging of the batteries. When a machine’s battery pack voltage falls below a specifically defined threshold (voltage settings), the scrub system automatically shuts down. The drive motor will still operate in the low-voltage cut-out mode to allow the machine to be driven to a charging location.

The low-voltage cut-out level is adjustable. The standard lead-acid battery (wet cell) setting is 1.72 volts per cell. The alternate maintenance-free battery (gel cell) setting is 1.81 volts per cell. The standard lead-acid battery setting is factory-selected and should be used unless the battery manufacturer specifies the higher cut-out voltage.

Service Note: A minimum recharge voltage of 2.13 volts per cell must be reached to allow the scrub and solution systems to function again (reset). A 36-volt battery pack must increase to a 38.6-volt minimum.

Battery condition indicator

The battery indicator displays the state of battery charge. Five vertical bars indicates a fully-charged battery after a complete charging cycle. The battery indicator will retain the state-of-charge even if the key switch has been turned off. The state-of-charge indicator is reset to full charge when the batteries have been recharged. It is also possible to choose between two different low-voltage thresholds depending on whether maintenance-free or standard (lead-acid) batteries are being used (Have a qualified service engineer perform this selection*.)

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 59, used with permission. SES ref PF-OGH6-6FKU‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌‌‍‌‍⁠⁠‌‌‌​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 59 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Note: The following table represents how many “bars” are displayed in the battery indicator icon based on the actual battery voltage.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‌⁠‌​​​‌‌​⁠‍‌​‍‌‍‍⁠⁠⁠‌

Battery IndicatorStandardAlternate
5 vertical indicator bars36.1+36.1+
4 vertical indicator bars35.5-36.135.5-36.1
3 vertical indicator bars34.4-35.534.4-35.5
2 vertical indicator bars33.9-34.433.9-34.4
1 vertical indicator bars32.2-33.933.3-33.9
0 vertical indicator bars30.9-32.232.8-33.3
Low-voltage Cut-out<30.9<32.8
Battery indicator icon showing five vertical bars
Battery indicator icon
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 60, used with permission. SES ref PF-QATM-QGWX‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‌⁠‌​​​‌‌​⁠‍‌​‍‌‍‍⁠⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 60 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Component locations

Photo of the electrical compartment beside the operator seat, with labels for the circuit breakers, K5 auxiliary contactor and H1 backup alarm
Circuit breakers, K5 auxiliary contactor and H1 backup alarm
Photo of the machine rear with the F4 250 amp fuse location circled and a close-up of the fuse connector
F4 250 amp fuse
Photo of the operator seat with the seat switch labeled below it
Seat switch
Photo of the control panel with the S1 key switch labeled at its right end
S1 key switch
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 61, used with permission. SES ref PF-POKQ-2VON‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌​‍⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‌‌​‌‌​⁠‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 61 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
Photo of the machine with the S3 battery interlock switch location circled and a close-up of the switch near the rear wheel
S3 battery interlock switch
Drawing of the electrical panel with contactors labeled K1 vacuum, K2 right brush, K3 center brush, K4 left brush, K5 auxiliary, K6 side brooms and K7 main
Contactors K1 to K7
Photo under the machine showing the H4 horn and the solution filter
H4 horn and solution filter
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 62, used with permission. SES ref PF-6UTV-2WGX‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍‍⁠​​​‍‌​⁠​‌‌‌‍​‍⁠⁠⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 62 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Battery location

The Batteries are located in the battery compartment behind the operator seat and underneath the recovery tank.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‍​​‍‌‍​‍⁠‍​‌‍‌‍​​‍⁠⁠‌

The Battery Disconnect is mounted on the right side of the operator seat.

Photo of the battery compartment behind the operator seat showing the six batteries and the battery disconnect on the right side of the seat
Battery (6) and battery disconnect locations
Photo of a hand pulling apart the grey battery disconnect connector
Battery disconnect
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 63, used with permission. SES ref PF-HNY3-G5CA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​​⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‍​​‍‌‍​‍⁠‍​‌‍‌‍​​‍⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 63 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Connector pin-outs

In shortPages 64 to 66 list the wire ID at every pin of connector J1 and J2 (A2 control board), J3 (A3 display panel) and X6 (A1 speed controller). Blank pins have no wire listed.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​​‍⁠⁠‍‍​⁠‍‌‌‍‌⁠​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠

J1 connects to A2 control board

Pin No.Wire ID
1BLU/GRA 18-1
2BRN/BLU 18-1
3GRN/BLU 18-1
4ORN/RED 18-1
5GRN 18-2
6TAN/BRN 18-1
7BLK/GRA 18-1
8ORN 18-3
9ORN/BRA 18-1
10BLK 16-3
11RED/WHT 18-1
12YEL/RED 18-1
13GRA 18-1
14BLK 16-4
15VIO 16-1
16WHT/VIO 18-1
17GRA/RED 18-1
18YEL/GRN 18-1
19YEL/BLU 18-1
20BLU/RED 18-1
21BLU/ORN 18-1
22WHT/BRN 18-1
23VIO 16-2
Two views of the 23-pin AMP connector with pins numbered 1 to 8 across the top row and 16 to 23 across the bottom row
Connector AMP 770680-1

Connector shown: AMP 770680-1.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​​‍⁠⁠‍‍​⁠‍‌‌‍‌⁠​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 64, used with permission. SES ref PF-DJTL-5PXC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​​‍⁠⁠‍‍​⁠‍‌‌‍‌⁠​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 64 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

J2 connects to A2 control board

Pin No.Wire ID
1WHT/GRN 18-1
2BRN 18-1
3ORN/BLU 18-1
4ORN/BLK 18-1
5YEL/GRA 18-1
6RED/BLK 18-1
7GRN/ORN 18-1
8GRA/VIO 18-1
9BLU/BRN 18-1
10BLK 16-1
11
12
13
14BLK 16-2
15BRN/BLK 18-1
16GRN/WHT 18-1
17VIO/YEL 18-1
18ORN/BRN 18-1
19BLU/BLK 18-1
20BLK/WHT 18-1
21BLK/ORN 18-1
22BLU 18-1
23BLU/WHT 18-1
Two views of the 23-pin AMP connector for J2 with pin 1 marked
Connector AMP 770680-4

Connector shown: AMP 770680-4.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‌​‌​⁠‍‌‍⁠⁠​⁠​‌‍⁠‌

J3 connects to A3 display panel

Pin No.Wire ID
1WHT/BRN 18-1
2GRA 18-1
3GRN/BLU 18-1
4BRN/BLU 18-1
Two views of the four-pin Molex connector for J3 with pin 1 marked
Connector MOLEX 39-01-3048

Connector shown: MOLEX 39-01-3048.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 65, used with permission. SES ref PF-FWXI-I7MP‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‌​‌​⁠‍‌‍⁠⁠​⁠​‌‍⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 65 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

X6 connects to A1 speed controller

Pin No.Wire ID
1ORN
2
3ORN/RED
4YEL/RED
5RED/WHT
6BLK/YEL
7BLK/PINK
8TAN/RED
9GRN
10BLU/BLK
11BLK/WHT
12
13
14
15VIO/BLK
16BRN/RED
17
18WHT/BLK
19
20
21
22
23
24
25VIO/WHT
26PINK/RED
27
28WHT/ORN
29BLU/GRN
30
31PINK/WHT
32PINK/BLU
33
34
35
Two views of the 35-pin black AMP connector for X6 with pin 1 and pin 35 marked
Connector AMP 776164-1 black

Connector shown: AMP 776164-1, black.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠‌‍‌‍​‍‌​‌​‍‍‌⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠​‍

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 66, used with permission. SES ref PF-JAAH-NYJB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠‌‍‌‍​‍‌​‌​‍‍‌⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 66 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
In shortEach connector below lists its pin letters or numbers and the wire ID on each pin, and the drawing shows what the connector looks like. Where a pin has no wire ID printed, such as pin G on X59 (page 72) and pins C through H on X59A (page 73), the manual shows it blank. If you are stuck, call us at 800-440-6723.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍‍​​​‍​​‌​‌‍‌‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠​‌

X7 connects to drive motor

Pin no.Wire ID
1PNK-RED W006
2PNK-BLU W005
3BLK-PNK W004
4TAN-RED W003
5PNK-WHT W002
6BLK-PNK W001
Six-pin Deutsch DTM06-6S connector, end view with pins 1 and 6 marked and an angled view
X7 connector, Deutsch DTM06-6S

X8 connector for Curtis programmer

Pin no.Wire ID
1BLU/GRA 18-1
2BLK/PINK 18-6
3WHT/ORN 18-1
4VIO/WHT 18-1
Four-pin Molex 39-01-3049 connector, angled view and end view with pin 1 marked
X8 connector, Molex 39-01-3049

X10

Connects to S3 Battery Interlock Switch X9 if equipped. If not, connects to X51 Jumper‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍‍​​​‍​​‌​‌‍‌‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠​‌

Pin no.Wire ID
AGRY/ORN 18-1
BGRN 18-1
Two-pin Delphi 12010973 connector, end view with pin A marked and an angled view
X10 connector, Delphi 12010973
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 67, used with permission. SES ref PF-K45E-ZMVC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍‍​​​‍​​‌​‌‍‌‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 67 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

X12 connects to H2 flashing lamp X11

Pin no.Wire ID
ABLK 18-7
BORN 18-6
Two-pin Delphi connector 12015792: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X12 connector, Delphi 12015792

X13 connects to M12 solution control pump X14

Pin no.Wire ID
AVIO 18-13
BBLU/ORN 18-1
Two-pin Delphi connector 12010973: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X13 connector, Delphi 12010973

X16 connects to L1 solution solenoid valve X15

Pin no.Wire ID
AYEL/GRN 18-1
BVIO 18-9
Two-pin Delphi connector 12015792: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X16 connector, Delphi 12015792
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 68, used with permission. SES ref PF-NPKM-GTEB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​‌‍‍​⁠​‍‍‌​⁠⁠⁠‍‍‌‍⁠​​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 68 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

X18 connects to M2 brush actuator X17

Pin no.Wire ID
ARED/BLK 18-1
BYEL/GRA 18-1
Two-pin Delphi connector 12015792: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X18 connector, Delphi 12015792

X20 connects to M3 squeegee actuator X19

Pin no.Wire ID
AWHT/GRN 18-1
BBLU/BRN 18-1
Two-pin Delphi connector 12015792: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X20 connector, Delphi 12015792

X22 connects to M4 side broom actuator X21

Pin no.Wire ID
AGRAB/VIO 18-1
BGRN/ORN 18-1
Two-pin Delphi connector 12015792: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X22 connector, Delphi 12015792
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 69, used with permission. SES ref PF-IXZ6-P5IA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‌⁠‌​‍​​⁠‍‌‍‍⁠⁠⁠‍​​‍‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 69 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

X29 connects to M7 left side broom motor X27

Pin no.Wire ID
ABLK 18-3
BWHT/RED 18-1
Two-pin Delphi 12052613 connector, end view with pin A marked and an angled view
X29 connector, Delphi 12052613

X30 connects to M8 right side broom motor X28

Pin no.Wire ID
ABLK 18-5
BWHT/RED 18-2
Two-pin Delphi 12052613 connector, end view with pin A marked and an angled view
X30 connector, Delphi 12052613

X32

Pin no.Wire ID
AVIO/BLK 18-1
BBRN/RED 18-1
CWHT/BLK 18-1
Three-pin Delphi 12162182 connector, end view with pin A marked and an angled view
X32 connector, Delphi 12162182
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 70, used with permission. SES ref PF-4VT2-SY5H‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠‌​‍‌‌‍​‌‌⁠‍‍⁠‌​‍‍‍‌‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 70 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

X41 connects to R2 scrub deck sensing resistor X40

Pin no.Wire ID
AGRN/WHT 18-1
BORN/BLK 18-1
Two-pin Delphi connector 12015792: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X41 connector, Delphi 12015792

X43 connects to S5 solution tank float switch X42

Pin no.Wire ID
AVIO/YEL 18-1
BBLK 18-2
Two-pin Delphi connector 12010973: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X43 connector, Delphi 12010973

X49 connects to X48 connector of vacuum motor wiring harness

Pin no.Wire ID
ABLU/GRN 10-1
BBLK 10-8
Two-pin Delphi 12065863 connector, end view with pin A marked and an angled view
X49 connector, Delphi 12065863
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 71, used with permission. SES ref PF-SBGZ-6XIH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‌⁠​‍‍‍‍⁠‌‌⁠⁠⁠‌‌‍‍⁠‍​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 71 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

X51

Connector, Battery Interlock Switch Jumper (used when there is not an optional interlock switch)‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠⁠‍‌‍‍‍⁠‌‍‍⁠⁠‍​‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠

Pin no.Wire ID
ABLK 18-8
BBLK 18-8
Two-pin Delphi connector 12015792: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X51 connector, Delphi 12015792

X55 connects to M15 accessory pump (optional) X54

Pin no.Wire ID
AVIO 18-15
BBLK 18-11
Two-pin Delphi connector 12010973: an end view with pin A marked and a side view
X55 connector, Delphi 12010973

X59 connects to telematics connector jumper X59A

Pin no.Wire ID
AORN/YEL 18-1
BORN 18-1
CYEL BRN 18-3
DBLU 18-2
EYEL/BLU 18-2
FRED/WHT 18-3
G
HBLK 18-12
Eight-pin Delphi 12047937 connector, angled view and end view with pin A marked
X59 connector, Delphi 12047937
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 72, used with permission. SES ref PF-WXEU-UCWP‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠⁠‍‌‍‍‍⁠‌‍‍⁠⁠‍​‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 72 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

X59A telematics connector jumper

Pin no.Wire ID
ABLK 18-13
BBLK 18-13
C
D
E
F
G
H
Eight-pin Delphi 12047931 connector, angled view and end view with pin A marked
X59A connector, Delphi 12047931

X60 (Deutsch DTM04-6P) connects to X61

Pin no.Wire ID
1PNK-RED W006
2PNK-BLU W005
3BLK-PNK W004
4TAN-RED W003
5PNK-WHT W002
6BLK-PNK W001
Six-pin Deutsch DTM04-6P connector, end view with pin 1 marked and an angled view
X60 connector, Deutsch DTM04-6P

X61 (Deutsch DT M06-6s) connects to X60

Pin no.Wire ID
1PNK-RED W006
2PNK-BLU W005
3BLK-PNK W004
4TAN-RED W003
5PNK-WHT W002
6BLK-PNK W001
Six-pin Deutsch DTM06-6S connector, end view with pins 1 and 6 marked and an angled view
X61 connector, Deutsch DTM06-6S
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 73, used with permission. SES ref PF-KHCW-W4QE‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌‍​‌​‍‌‍⁠⁠‍‌‌​‌⁠⁠‍⁠​‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 73 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

WARNING! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off and the key is removed from the machine.
In shortCheck the battery water level weekly, keep the batteries charged, and keep the tops and terminals clean. Use distilled water, never add acid, and do not overfill.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌⁠​​​⁠​‌‍⁠​​‍‌⁠​⁠‌‍‌‌‍

Wet-cell battery maintenance

Correct maintenance of electric vehicle batteries can greatly extend their life. Well-maintained batteries may last up to three years, but failure after one year is common if maintenance has been inadequate.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌⁠​​​⁠​‌‍⁠​​‍‌⁠​⁠‌‍‌‌‍

There are three simple rules for good battery maintenance:

  • Maintain the correct electrolyte level (check weekly). Use distilled water in batteries whenever possible. If batteries are discharged, add just enough water to cover the plates in each cell. If batteries are fully-charged, fill each cell to the bottom of the filler tube. Do not overfill the batteries! Do not add acid to batteries!
  • Keep the batteries charged (charge weekly). Batteries should be charged each time that a machine is used for more than one hour. The battery compartment cover should be open during charging to avoid a concentrated buildup of hydrogen gas. Operators should follow the instructions provided with their specific battery charger to determine how long the batteries should be charged. Even when a machine is stored, the batteries should be charged once a month to prevent the batteries from “sulfating”. Almost all battery caps are vented, so there’s no need to loosen or remove them for charging.
  • Keep the batteries clean (check and clean monthly). Use a damp cloth to wipe dirt from the top of the batteries. Battery terminals must be clean and tight. If the tops of the batteries are wet after charging, the batteries have probably been overfilled or overcharged.

Note: If there is acid on the batteries, wash the tops of the batteries with a solution of two tablespoons of baking soda to one quart (about 1 liter) of water.

Checking the battery water level

  1. Check the water level of the batteries at least once a week.
  2. After charging the batteries, remove the vent caps and check the water level in each battery cell. Use distilled or demineralized water in a battery filling dispenser (available at most auto parts stores) to fill each cell to the level indicator (or to approximately 3/8 in (10 mm) over the top of the separators). Do not overfill the batteries!
    CAUTION! Acid can spill onto the floor if the batteries are overfilled.
  3. Tighten the vent caps.
  4. Wash the tops of the batteries with a solution of baking soda and water. Use a mixture of two tablespoons of baking soda to one quart (about 1 liter) of water).

Charging wet-cell batteries

Charge the batteries each time the machine is used, or when the battery indicator is reading less than full.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 74, used with permission. SES ref PF-WW42-BJOV‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌⁠​​​⁠​‌‍⁠​​‍‌⁠​⁠‌‍‌‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 74 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

To charge the batteries

  1. Disconnect the machine battery connector.
  2. Open the side access panel and push the connector from the charger into the battery connector.
  3. Follow the instructions on the battery charger.
  4. After charging the batteries, check the fluid level in all battery cells. Add distilled water if necessary to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler tubes.
    WARNING!
    • Do not fill the batteries before charging.
    • Charge the batteries in a well-ventilated area.
    • Do not smoke while servicing the batteries.

When servicing batteries

  • Remove all jewelry.
  • Do not smoke.
  • Wear safety glasses, rubber gloves and a rubber apron.
  • Work in a well-ventilated area.
  • Do not allow tools to touch more than one battery terminal at a time.
  • ALWAYS disconnect the negative (ground) cable first when replacing batteries to prevent sparks.
  • ALWAYS connect the negative cable last when installing batteries.
CAUTION! To avoid damage to floor surfaces, wipe water and acid from the top of the batteries after charging.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 75, used with permission. SES ref PF-H2AZ-CTTC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍⁠‍‍​⁠​​‍​‌‌‍‌⁠‍​⁠‍​‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 75 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

Battery testing

A battery problem is usually recognized by the machine operator as a decrease in the machine’s running time. This condition is usually caused by one or more “dead cells” in the battery system – that is, one or more cells that are putting out less voltage than the other cells.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠​‍‍‌‌‍‌⁠​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​‍‍​​⁠⁠

Note: Always charge batteries before testing.

There are two ways to find a dead cell:

  • Use a voltmeter to check the voltage of each battery with the scrub and drive motors running. The battery with the dead cell will read 1 or 2 volts lower than the other batteries in the system.
  • Use a hydrometer to check the specific gravity (or “state of charge”) of the fluid in each cell. A dead cell is one that reads 50 points (or more) lower than the other cells.

If the batteries in the machine are more than one year old, it’s usually best to replace the whole set rather than replacing just one battery.

Approximate state of charge corresponding to electrolyte specific gravity
State of chargeSpecific gravity
Charged1.265 Initial Full Charge
100%1.265
75%1.225
50%1.190
25%1.155
Discharged1.120

General troubleshooting

ProblemCauseCorrection
No power to the machineThe emergency stop switch/battery disconnect by the Operator seat is not connected.Connect the emergency stop switch/battery disconnect.
There is a problem on the battery wiring or connections.Check the wiring and connections and clean/repair as necessary.
The 250-amp fuse (F4) is blown.Replace the fuse.
Short machine run time.Weak batteries or battery/batteries with a dead cell.Charge and test the batteries. Replace as necessary.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 76, used with permission. SES ref PF-CRIN-IJGI‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠​‍‍‌‌‍‌⁠​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​‍‍​​⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 76 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

WARNING! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off and the key is removed from the machine.

To install the batteries

WARNING!
  • Use extreme caution when working with batteries. Sulfuric acid in batteries can cause severe injury if allowed to contact the skin or eyes.
  • Explosive hydrogen gas is vented from the batteries through openings in the battery caps. This gas can be ignited by any spark, flame or electrical arc. Do not install any lead-acid battery in a sealed container or enclosure. Hydrogen gas from overcharging must be allowed to escape.
CAUTION!
  • Electrical components in this machine can be severely damaged if the batteries are not installed and connected correctly.
  • The batteries must be installed only by an Advance representative or dealer, a qualified electrician or the battery manufacturer.
  1. Remove the batteries from their shipping crate and carefully inspect them for cracks or other damage. If damage is evident, contact the carrier that delivered them, or the battery manufacturer, to file a damage claim.
  2. Turn the key switch off and remove the key.
  3. Remove the recovery tank from the machine. (Refer to the Recovery System/Removal and Installation/Recovery Tank section.)
  4. Your machine comes from the factory with enough battery cables to install six 6-volt batteries. Using at least two people and an appropriate lifting strap, carefully lift the batteries into the battery compartment and arrange them exactly as shown. Secure the batteries as close to the front of the machine as possible. If installing a monoblock battery, use an overhead hoist.
  5. Install the battery cables as shown. Position the cables so the battery caps can be removed easily for battery service.
Battery compartment layout showing six 6-volt batteries (four in the front row, two behind) with the battery disconnect connector, and a second layout for a single 36 volt monoblock battery, with a FRONT arrow
Battery layouts and cable routing

Text printed above the layouts: “450 AH @ 20 HR RATE, 1300 lb (590 kg), (6) max”. “Battery Disconnect” is marked. Six-battery layout labels: 56407358 and “395AH@20HR 56388582”. Monoblock layout: “36V”, “450AH@20HR 56409691” and “480AH@5HR (EU only)”. The arrow marks the front of the machine.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌⁠‌⁠⁠‌‍‍‌⁠‌‍⁠​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 77, used with permission. SES ref PF-Z67B-XAZ7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌⁠‌⁠⁠‌‍‍‌⁠‌‍⁠​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 77 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Carefully tighten the nut in each battery terminal until the terminal will not turn. Do not overtighten the terminals or they will be very difficult to remove for future service.
  2. Coat the terminals with spray-on battery terminal coating (available at most auto parts stores).
  3. Put one of the black rubber boots over each of the terminals and connect the Battery Disconnect.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 78, used with permission. SES ref PF-A7G3-GCAA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍​⁠‍​⁠​​​⁠​⁠‍‌​‍‌‍​‍‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 78 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

ComponentSpecifications
Wet cell batteriesUse a combination of multiple 2-volt cell units to construct a 36-volt DC battery pack system.
Advance-recommended battery pack capacity is a 395 AH @ 20 Hour Rate deep cycle battery system. Note that the battery pack must fit the battery compartment size listed in the Technical Specifications.
Wet cell battery chargerUse a 36-volt DC output charger matching the DC battery pack voltage and the input AC line voltage supply being used.
When selecting a battery charger always follow the recommendation of the battery supplier to match the correct charger DC output amperage to the amp-hour rating batteries being installed. This will prevent the battery pack from being overcharged or undercharged.
The recommended 395 AH battery should be matched to a 36-volt, 36-amp output charger on machines using six 6-volt batteries.
The optional 450 AH battery should be matched to the Advance 36-volt, 38-amp output charger.

Special tools

A hydrometer can be used to check the specific gravity of the battery electrolyte. A typical example is shown here.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‍⁠‌‌‍‍‌​⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠‌‍​⁠​‍‍

A typical battery hydrometer: a clear glass tube with a black rubber bulb at one end and a tube/cable at the other
Typical hydrometer
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 79, used with permission. SES ref PF-3YVQ-NKSZ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‍⁠‌‌‍‍‌​⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠‌‍​⁠​‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 79 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wiring diagram tips

In shortEach wiring diagram sheet has a grid, so a spot on a sheet is found by its sheet number, column letter and row number, such as 2E3. Relays and contactors are drawn in two pieces, and circuits that continue elsewhere carry a “continued” symbol and the address of the other end (see page 81).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠⁠​‍‍‌⁠​‍‌⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​

Wiring diagrams show how electrical components are connected together and to a large degree “how things work”. They do not show where things are located. Here are some tips when using these diagrams.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠⁠​‍‍‌⁠​‍‌⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​

Wiring diagrams may have multiple pages or sheets. The perimeter of each sheet defines a “grid” like a map; with A-G printed across the top and bottom margins of the sheet to define vertical columns and 1-5 printed on the right and left margins of the sheet to define rows. The sheet number and grid coordinates make up an “address” and are used for locating an area on the sheet where an item may be found. The address begins with the sheet number followed by the letter and number that define the coordinates on the sheet. In the example below, the address for the red circle is 2E3.

Blank diagram sheet 2 of 3 with columns A to G across the top and rows 1 to 5 down the side, and a red circle in column E, row 3
The “address” for the red circle is 2E3

Every component has both an “ID” and a “name” on the sheet.

Part of a wiring diagram with the component ID R1 circled and labeled Component ID, and the component name DRIVE PEDAL POT. 5k OHM circled and labeled Component Name
Component ID and component name
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 80, used with permission. SES ref PF-2T3C-64V2‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠⁠​‍‍‌⁠​‍‌⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 80 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Typically relays (and contactors) are “split up” so that the relay winding is separated from the contacts. The “control” side of the relay is shown in one location and the “load” side of the relay is shown in another location. The two pieces may or may not be on the same page. The location of the contacts is described next to the winding and vice versa.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠‍‌‌​​‍‌‍‌‌​⁠‍‌‍​‌​

Wiring diagram detail: the K1 winding labeled “TO 3C2”, with 3C2 circled as the address of the K1 contacts
K1 winding shown on sheet 1
Wiring diagram detail: the K1 contacts labeled “TO 1B3”, with 1B3 circled as the address of the K1 winding
K1 contacts shown on sheet 3

Sometimes a circuit line is interrupted and is continued on another sheet or another location on the same sheet. When this occurs you will need to match two termination points. At each termination point you will see a “continued” symbol. Near the symbol the circuit will be identified by a wire color, a description of the circuit or a unique letter. The circuit identification must be used to match the mating termination point. There is also an address of where to find the mating termination point. See examples below.

Two “continued” symbols on a wiring diagram: one on a violet wire reading “TO 3B2” and one labeled “B+” reading “TO 2B1”, with callouts for wire color identification, circuit description identification, the continued symbols and the address of the mating termination point
Examples of “continued” symbols

To find a connector that plugs into a component, see the Component Locations section to locate the component then follow the wire lead (if there is one) to the connector. If you need more detailed information about what a multi-pin connector looks like and where the wires are located in the connector, see the Connector Pin-Outs section.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 81, used with permission. SES ref PF-76YJ-VOCU‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠‍‌‌​​‍‌‍‌‌​⁠‍‌‍​‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 81 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wiring diagram PN 56414095 REV C sheet 1 of 3

In shortThis is sheet 1 of the three-sheet ladder wiring diagram for the SC6500. Sheet 1 shows the battery, fuse and breakers, the contactors, and the A2 control board connections. Sheet 2 is the wheel drive (page 83) and sheet 3 is the vacuum, brush and side broom motors (page 84).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‍‍‍​‍⁠‌​⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‌⁠⁠​‍
Wiring diagram sheet 1 of 3 (PN 56414095 REV C) showing the 36 volt battery, 250 amp fuse, circuit breakers, key switch, seat switch, contactors, horn, pump and solenoid loads, the A2 control board assembly with its J1 and J2 terminals, the A3 switch/display panel, the three actuators, the solution empty switch, the scrub deck sensing resistor and the telematics connector
Wiring diagram PN 56414095 REV C, sheet 1 of 3

Components shown on sheet 1

IDName as printedOther text printed on the drawing
BT1Battery, 36 VDCRED + / BLK -
X3, X4(connectors at the battery, no name printed)
F4Fuse, 250 A.
F1Circuit breaker, 3 amp
F2Circuit breaker, 15 amp
S1Switch, key
D1Diode
S2Switch, seat
S3Switch, bat. interlock (for roll out battery)(Optional); see note 5
K5Contactor, aux.
K1Contactor, vacuum
K2Contactor, right brush
K3Contactor, center brush
K4Contactor, left brush
K6Contactor, side brooms
H4Horn
H1Back up alarm(Optional)
M12Pump, solution control(Optional)
L1Valve, solenoid
L2Solenoid, chemical metering(Optional)
L3Solenoid, chemical metering(Optional)
A2Control board assembly
A3Switch/display panel assembly
M2Brush actuator(+,+,EXTENDS); see note 3
M3Squeegee actuator(+,+,EXTENDS); see note 3
M4Side broom actuator(+,+,EXTENDS); see note 3
S5Switch, solution empty(Closes when empty)
R2Resistor, scrub deck sensing1K ohm for 40 in disk; 10K ohm for 40 in cyl.; 20K ohm for 45 in and 48 in disk; 40K ohm for 45 in and 48 in cyl.
X59 / X59ATelematics connector

Control board signal labels

LabelTerminal
MotionJ1-11
DirectionJ1-12
FaultJ1-4
Mode 2J2-20
Mode 1J2-19
+8VJ1-22
B-J1-13
CAN HJ1-3
CAN LJ1-2
Brush senseJ2-2
Vac senseJ2-3

Notes printed on the sheet

No.Note
1.Reference wiring diagram 56414096.
2.For normal operation without telematics a jumper needs to be in place on connector X59 pins 1 and 2.
3.+,+,EXTENDS means with the positive of the battery connected to the red actuator terminal, the actuator will extend.
4.Connector designation contains a 3 letter prefix relating to the circuit function of the wire and the grid location of other end of the wire.
5.S3 will be a jumper on machines without the battery interlock option.

Corrected an obvious misprint: note 5 is printed “WIHTOUT” (now “without”) and note 4 prints “THE THE” (now “the”).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‍‍‍​‍⁠‌​⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‌⁠⁠​‍

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 82, used with permission. SES ref PF-DL3Q-MBN7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‍‍‍​‍⁠‌​⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‌⁠⁠​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 82 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wiring diagram PN 56414095 REV C sheet 2 of 3

Wiring diagram sheet 2 of 3 (PN 56414095 REV C) showing the A1 wheel drive controller, the main contactor K7, the M1 drive wheel motor with encoder, the R1 drive pedal pot, the X7 motor connector, the X8 programmer connector and the optional flashing lamp H2
Wiring diagram PN 56414095 REV C, sheet 2 of 3

Components shown on sheet 2

IDName as printedOther text printed on the drawing
A1Wheel drive controller
K7Main contactor
H2Lamp, flashing(Optional)
M1Motor drive wheel (3~)Encoder, PWR
R1Drive pedal pot., 5k ohmREV. / FOR.
X7(connector, no name printed)Pins 1 to 6
X8Programmer connectorPins 1 to 4

Wheel drive controller terminal labels

TerminalLabel
X6-5Motion
X6-4Direction
X6-3Fault
X6-11Mode 2
X6-10Mode 1
X6-26+5V
X6-32Phase B
X6-7Temp sensor GND
X6-8Temp sensor
X6-31Phase A
X6-15+5V throttle pot high
X6-16Throttle pot wiper
X6-18B- throttle pot low
X6-25+12V
X6-28TX
X6-29RX

X7 wire labels

PinWire label
1PINK/RED
2PINK/BLU
3BLK/PINK
4TAN/RED
5PINK/WHT
6BLK/PINK

X8 programmer connector wire labels

PinWire label
4VIO/WHT
3WHT/ORN
2BLK/PINK
1BLU/GRN

The drawing prints BLU/GRN for X8 pin 1; the pin-out table on page 67 prints BLU/GRA 18-1.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠⁠​​‍​​​​⁠⁠‌⁠‍‍​​‌‌⁠‌​

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 83, used with permission. SES ref PF-BE4T-3P7T‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠⁠​​‍​​​​⁠⁠‌⁠‍‍​​‌‌⁠‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 83 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wiring diagram PN 56414095 REV C sheet 3 of 3

Wiring diagram sheet 3 of 3 (PN 56414095 REV C) showing the accessory pump M15 with zener D2, the head lamp H3, the two vacuum motors M5 and M6 behind contactor K1, the side broom motors M7 and M8 behind K6 and breaker F3, and the brush motors M9, M10 and M11 behind contactors K2, K3 and K4
Wiring diagram PN 56414095 REV C, sheet 3 of 3

Components shown on sheet 3

IDName as printedOther text printed on the drawing
F3Circuit breaker, 20 A.
K1Contactor, vacuum
K6Contactor, side brooms
K2Contactor, right brush
K3Contactor, center brush
K4Contactor, left brush
D2Zener TVS
M15Pump, accessory(Optional)
H3Lamp, head(Optional)
M5Motor, vacuum
M6Motor, vacuum
M7Motor, side broom
M8Motor, side broom
M9Motor, right brush(+ on 40 in disk) (- on 40 in disk) (used as left or right on cyl)
M10Motor, center brush(left motor on 2 motor decks) (used as left or right on cyl)
M11Motor, left brush(on 3 motor decks)
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 84, used with permission. SES ref PF-27OX-KG4B‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍​‌‌‍​‌​‌‌‌⁠‌‍‍​‍‍⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 84 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wiring harness diagram 56414096_REV_C

In shortThis is the wiring harness drawing that goes with the ladder diagram on pages 82 to 84. It shows the harness connectors, splices and wire labels component by component.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍​⁠‌​⁠‍‌⁠​‌​‌​‍‌‌‌‌​‍‍
Wiring harness diagram 56414096 REV C showing every machine component with its connectors (X numbers), splice points (SP numbers) and labeled wires, laid out around the A2 control board and the A1 speed control
Wiring harness diagram 56414096_REV_C

Components named on the harness diagram

IDName as printed
S1Switch, key
A3Display panel
D1Diode
F1Circuit breaker, 3 amp
F2Circuit breaker, 15 amp
F3Circuit breaker, 20 amp
A2Control board (connectors J2 gray and J1 black)
H1Back up alarm (optional)
K1Contactor, vacuum
K5Contactor, aux.
K2Contactor, right brush
K6Contactor, side brooms
K7Contactor, main
K3Contactor, center brush
K4Contactor, left brush
A1Speed control
L1Valve, solenoid
H4Horn
S5Switch, float (solution tank)
M5Motor, vac
M6Motor, vac
M3Actuator, squeegee
M4Actuator, side broom
M2Actuator, brush
S2Switch, seat
H2Lamp, flashing (optional)
R2Resistor, scrub deck sensing
M11Motor, left brush (on 3 motor decks)
M10Motor, center brush (left motor on 2 motor decks)
M9Motor, right brush (+ for 40 in disk) (- for 40 in disk)
M1Drive motor
M7Motor, left side broom
M8Motor, right side broom
H3Lamp, head
BT1Battery, 36 Vdc
F4Fuse, 250 A.
M15Pump, accessory (optional)
D2Zener TVS
S3Switch, bat interlock (optional)
M16Pump, chemical metering (optional)
M13Pump, chemical metering (optional)
M12Pump, solution control (optional)
R1Pot. 5K ohm
X59 / X59ATelematics connector
X52GROUND
X58GROUND

Notes printed on the harness diagram

ItemText
A4Not used with EcoFlex.
S3 / X9 / X10 / X51Note: When battery roll out option is used, X9 connects to X10, and X51 is not used.
Note 1.Reference wiring diagram 56414095
Note 2.For normal operation without telematics a jumper needs to be in place on connector X59 pins 1 and 2
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 85, used with permission. SES ref PF-HKLW-FXDV‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍​⁠‌​⁠‍‌⁠​‌​‌​‍‌‌‌‌​‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 85 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Options and accessories

In shortThese pages show the option kits available for the SC6500: bumpers, spray wand, warning beacon, back-up alarm, overhead guard, seats and seat belt, and a second vacuum motor kit. Call us at 800-440-6723 to order the right kit for your machine.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‍‌‍⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍⁠‍‍​‌‍‍​​
DescriptionIllustration
Heavy duty front bumper
Exploded drawing of the heavy duty front bumper with its mounting brackets, bolts, washers and nuts
Illustration
Tube Bumper Kit
Exploded drawing of the tube bumper kit with numbered callouts for the bumper, tube guard, brackets and fasteners
Illustration
Spray Wand
Exploded drawing of the spray wand kit showing the wand with squeegee head, the hose, the mounting bracket, the pump and the tubing, with numbered callouts
Illustration
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 86, used with permission. SES ref PF-I3RV-RROX‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‍‌‍⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍⁠‍‍​‌‍‍​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 86 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
DescriptionIllustration
Warning Beacon
Exploded drawing of the warning beacon, mast, bracket and fasteners
Illustration
Back-Up Alarm
Drawing of the control panel bracket with the back-up alarm shown beside it
Illustration
Overhead Guard
Exploded drawing of the overhead guard frame with its mounting brackets and fasteners
Illustration
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 87, used with permission. SES ref PF-NKSU-LFEA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌‌‍‍‌⁠‍‌⁠​‍‍​‍‌‍‌⁠​​‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 87 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
DescriptionIllustration
Seat Belt - Standard Seat
Exploded drawing of the standard seat with the seat belt buckles, brackets and fasteners
Illustration
Deluxe Grammer Seat
Exploded drawing of the deluxe Grammer seat with armrest, seat belt, slides and numbered callouts
Illustration
2nd vacuum motor kit
Exploded drawing of the second vacuum motor kit showing the motor, mounting plates and the vacuum tube
Illustration
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 88, used with permission. SES ref PF-MQCO-M22E‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍​​‌⁠⁠‍⁠​‌‌⁠​‌​​‌​‌‌‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 88 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
Description
Headlight
Exploded drawing of the headlight with its lamp housing, mounting bracket, guard, screws, washers, nuts and wire terminals
Headlight
Operator Foot Guard
Drawing of the operator foot guard, a curved shield on a flat mounting plate with screw holes
Operator foot guard
Solution Auto-Fill
Exploded drawing of the solution auto-fill kit with its mounting bracket, hose, clamps, fittings, screws and a cylindrical body (no label printed)
Solution auto-fill
Recovery Drain Hose Extension
Drawing of the recovery drain hose extension: a long hose with an end cap, clamps and fittings, with numbered callouts (no key is printed on the page)
Recovery drain hose extension
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 89, used with permission. SES ref PF-SCMX-LKCR‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‌‍‍​⁠‌​⁠⁠‌⁠‍⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 89 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Recovery system

Functional description

Overview

The recovery system picks up the scrubbing solution from the squeegee tool and directs it to the Recovery Tank.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌​⁠‍​​‌​​‍‌‌‍‍⁠​‍​​​‍

In shortThe vacuum motor draws air through the recovery tank so the squeegee can lift wastewater off the floor. No wastewater moves through the vacuum motor, only working air, and a float ball shuts the vacuum off when the tank is full (see page 91).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌​⁠‍​​‌​​‍‌‌‍‍⁠​‍​​​‍
Exploded drawing of the recovery system with labels: Top Cover Assembly, Float Cage and Ball, Recovery Tank Cover, Cover Gasket, Vacuum Motor, Recovery Tank, Vacuum Hose, Squeegee Hose, Drain Hose and Squeegee. An arrow marks the front of the machine
Recovery system components

Recovery tank

The Recovery Tank holds 70 gal (265 L) of wastewater and supports the Vacuum Motor, Recovery Tank Lid and Top Cover Assembly.

Vacuum motor

The Vacuum Motor draws air from the Recovery Tank to create a vacuum in the tank and at the Squeegee.

The Vacuum Motor switches on automatically when the scrub system is enabled and the machine moves forward. The Vacuum Motor will switch off after a predetermined time delay once machine motion stops.

The Vacuum Motor can also be switched on independent of the scrub system by pressing the vacuum/wand switch. This is used to pick up solution already on the floor, or when using a wand on the Squeegee Hose.

A current sensor monitors the Vacuum Motor current and will display a fault if the Vacuum Motor current draw is too high.

Squeegee and squeegee hose

The wastewater and air enter the vacuum system at the Squeegee tool through small openings (notches) located in the front Squeegee blade. The small openings are the entrance points for the water and air and help speed up the airflow, producing the suction to lift the wastewater off of the floor. The solution travels through the Squeegee Hose at high speed and into the Recovery Tank. The airflow continues through the Recovery Tank, vacuum fan inlet screen and Vacuum Motor, then is exhausted out of the Vacuum Hose. No wastewater ever actually moves through the Vacuum Motor, just the working air.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 90, used with permission. SES ref PF-JVKX-MNKP‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌​⁠‍​​‌​​‍‌‌‍‍⁠​‍​​​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 90 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Float cage and ball

A shutoff Float Cage and Ball prevent the Recovery Tank from being overfilled and stops any water from being sucked into the Vacuum Motor. When the Float Ball rises (to full-tank level) it will seat itself inside the Cage assembly and block off the Vacuum Motor airflow. This causes a reduced Vacuum Motor current load which is sensed by the A2 control board which automatically shuts off the vacuum and scrub systems.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‌‍‍⁠⁠​‌‌‍‌​‍‌‌‍‍‌⁠⁠‍‍

The LCD will then display the recovery tank full indicator icon to alert the operator that the recovery tank needs to be drained.

Two display icons: a caution triangle with an exclamation mark, and the recovery tank full icon, a tank with a fill level and an upward arrow
Recovery tank full indicator

Recovery system wiring diagram

Recovery system wiring diagram showing the 36V battery, F4 fuse, A1 speed controller, K7, F1 and F2 circuit breakers, S1 key switch, D1 diode, S2 seat switch, S3 battery interlock switch, K5 and K1 contactors, the A2 control board assembly, the A3 switch/display panel assembly and vacuum motors M5 and M6
Recovery system wiring diagram
LabelPrinted text
F4Fuse, 250 A
(battery symbol)36V Battery
A1Speed Controller (connector pins marked 16, 15, 8, 4, 3; terminals marked B- and B+)
K7(no description printed)
F1Circuit Breaker, 3 Amp
S1Key Switch
D1Diode
S2Seat Switch
S3Battery Interlock Switch (for roll-out Battery)
K5(no description printed)
F2Circuit Breaker, 15 Amp
A2Control Board Assembly (terminals marked Bat - (two), Bat +, Motion Direction, CAN H, CAN L, Vacuum Motor Shunt; line marked Battery Ground)
A3Switch/Display Panel Assembly
K1(no description printed)
M5Vacuum Motor
M6Vacuum Motor
B+Printed twice, at lower left
B-Printed at lower right
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 91, used with permission. SES ref PF-BGNU-FPAB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‌‍‍⁠⁠​‌‌‍‌​‍‌‌‍‍‌⁠⁠‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 91 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Circuit description

Vacuum Motors M5 and M6 get positive voltage from the Battery when the load sides of contactors K5 and K1 are closed. Contactors K5 and K1 close when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K5 and K1 contactor coils to battery ground. Vacuum Motors M5 and M6 are connected directly to battery ground.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‍​​‌‌‍⁠‌‍‍​​‌‍‌​​‌⁠⁠‍​

The A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K5 and K1 contactor coils to battery ground when:

  • The A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly sends the A2 Control Board Assembly a signal via the CAN BUS that the vacuum system has been switched on, or,
  • The A1 Speed Controller sends the A2 Control Board Assembly a signal that the wheel drive is switched on, the scrub system is enabled and the vacuum system has not been switched off.

Note: The A2 Control Board Assembly monitors the voltage input from the Vacuum Motor Shunt wire connected to the ground side of Vacuum Motors M5 and M6. If the voltage is out of the acceptable range (.07 - .12 volts for a single vacuum motor or .15 - .24 volts for dual vacuum motors), the A2 Control Board Assembly will sense that the float ball is sealed against the float cage and that the recovery tank is full. The A2 Control Board Assembly will then shut down the vacuum and scrub systems and display a recovery tank full icon on the LCD.

Component locations

Vacuum motor and vacuum hose

The Vacuum Motor sits in a cavity in the Recovery Tank. To access the Vacuum Motor, remove the five Phillips screws and washers holding the top cover assembly on the recovery tank and remove the top cover assembly.

Note that there is room in the Recovery Tank for an optional second Vacuum Motor.

The Vacuum Hose is clamped to the outlet side of the Vacuum Motor and exhausts the airflow from the Vacuum Motor through to the underside of the machine.

Photo looking down into the recovery tank cavity, with labels pointing to the vacuum motor, the vacuum hose (a flexible gray hose) and the recovery tank
Vacuum motor and vacuum hose
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 92, used with permission. SES ref PF-RZ7B-AJ5R‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‍​​‌‌‍⁠‌‍‍​​‌‍‌​​‌⁠⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 92 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Top cover assembly

The Top Cover Assembly is fastened to the top of the recovery tank and includes the Vacuum Filter Lid, Filter, Filter Screen and Recovery Tank Top. The Vacuum Cover Plate, Float Cage and contained Float Ball attach to the bottom of the Recovery Tank Top. The Vacuum Fan Top Gasket seals the Top Cover Assembly to the recovery tank.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌‌‍⁠‍⁠​‌​‌⁠​​‌​‌‍​⁠‍‌​

Float cage and ball

The Float Ball is retained inside the two-piece interlocking Float Cage. The assembled Float Cage and Float Ball attach to the bottom of the Recovery Tank Top.

Exploded drawing of the top cover assembly with labels: Vacuum Filter Lid, Wire Rope, Filter, Filter Screen, Recovery Tank Top, Vacuum Cover Plate, Vacuum Fan Top Gasket, Float Cage (shown twice) and Float Ball
Top cover assembly and float cage
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 93, used with permission. SES ref PF-YINY-N2KD‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌‌‍⁠‍⁠​‌​‌⁠​​‌​‌‍​⁠‍‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 93 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Recovery tank lid

The Recovery Tank Lid is hinged and opens to allow access to the Recovery Tank.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​‍​⁠​⁠‍‍‍‍‌⁠‍​‍⁠‌​‍⁠​‌

Squeegee and drain hoses

The Squeegee Hose and Drain Hoses are mounted on the rear of the Recovery Tank.

The Squeegee Hose connects the squeegee to the inlet port on the Recovery Tank.

The Drain Hose allows you to drain the Recovery Tank by removing the Drain Hose Cap.

Drawing of the recovery tank with labels pointing to the Recovery Tank Lid, Recovery Tank, Drain Hose Cap, Drain Hose and Squeegee Hose, with a small inset of the whole machine
Recovery tank lid, drain hose and squeegee hose
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 94, used with permission. SES ref PF-AXHD-WST2‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​‍​⁠​⁠‍‍‍‍‌⁠‍​‍⁠‌​‍⁠​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 94 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance

WARNING! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

To inspect and clean the vacuum filter and inlet screen

  1. Open the tethered Vacuum Filter Lid.
  2. Remove the Filter and Filter Screen by pulling them out of the recess in the Recovery Tank Top.
  3. Clean the Filter and Filter Screen with vacuum or by washing them in warm water.
  4. When the Filter and Filter Screen are clean and dry, reinstall them into the Recovery Tank Top.

Service Note: The Filter and Filter Screen must be completely dry before reinstalling.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​​​⁠⁠​⁠‌​‌​‌‍​‍‍​‍‍‌‍⁠

  1. Replace the Vacuum Filter Lid.
Exploded drawing with labels: Vacuum Filter Lid, Filter, Filter Screen and Recovery Tank Top
Vacuum filter, filter screen and recovery tank top

To inspect and clean the vacuum motor float cage

  1. Lift the Recovery Tank Lid to access the Float Cage and captive float ball. The Float Cage is attached to the underside of the Top Cover Assembly.
  2. Carefully remove the Float Cage from the Top Cover Assembly. Note that the Float Cage is a two-piece design and can be snapped apart to separate for cleaning.
  3. Clean any debris from the Float Cage slots with a rag, or by flushing the Float Cage with water. The Float Cage slots must be kept clean to prevent any airflow restriction.
  4. Reassemble the Float Cage and captive float ball and reinstall into the Top Cover Assembly.
  5. Inspect the Recovery Lid Gasket to make sure it is not damaged and is sealing correctly.
Exploded drawing with labels: Top Cover Assembly, Float Cage, Recovery Tank Lid, Recovery Lid Gasket and the recovery tank
Float cage, top cover assembly and recovery lid gasket
Parts for this job
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 95, used with permission. SES ref PF-KDRO-5IDT‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​​​⁠⁠​⁠‌​‌​‌‍​‍‍​‍‍‌‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 95 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

In shortPoor water pickup is usually a vacuum leak or a restriction in the squeegee tool, vacuum hoses or float cage. If the vacuum motor will not run, the table ties error codes 09, 10, 29, 30 and 31 to what to check. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you are not sure which fix applies.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‍⁠​‌‍‍‌‌​‌‍‌‍‌‍​⁠‌‌‍​

If water flows around the ends of the squeegee tool instead of being pulled into the tool, the vacuum system is not working correctly. This is usually due to either vacuum leaks, or restrictions in the squeegee tool, vacuum hoses or float cage.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‍⁠​‌‍‍‌‌​‌‍‌‍‌‍​⁠‌‌‍​

ProblemCauseCorrection
Poor water pickup* Vacuum leak(s) due to:
  • Leaky drain hose cap
  • Leaky hose
  • Bad gasket
  • Damaged tank
  • Check the drain hose cap and tighten/replace as necessary.
  • Check the squeegee and recovery tank hoses and tighten/replace as necessary.
  • Check the gaskets and replace as necessary.
  • Check the recovery tank for damage.
Parts ›
Restrictions due to built-up debris in the squeegee tool, vacuum hoses or float cage
  1. Check the squeegee tool, vacuum hoses and float cage for any accumulated dirt or debris and clean as necessary.
  2. Check the vacuum system airflow pathway wherever the airflow is forced to make a sharp turn for any accumulated dirt or debris and clean as necessary.
Vacuum motor(s) will not run.Vacuum motor overload (error code 09 displayed)
  1. Check for debris in the vacuum motor(s).
  2. Check for worn carbon brushes - replace brushes.
  3. Defective motor bearings - repair or replace.
  4. Check for a short circuit in the vacuum motor or wiring - repair or replace.
Vacuum motor contactor coil overload (error code 10 displayed)
  1. Check for a K1 coil wiring problem or short circuit (wire colors VIO and BLU).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the coil resistance is below 80 ohms, replace the coil.
Vacuum motor open (error code 29 displayed)
  1. Check for disconnected vacuum motor wiring.
  2. Check for an open circuit in the vacuum motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  3. Check for 36 Volts at the vacuum motor. If 0 Volts, replace the vacuum motor contactor K1.
Vacuum motor contactor coil open (error code 30 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the K1 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and BLU).
  2. Test for 36V at the K1 coil. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
K1 Vacuum motor contactor coil short to ground (error code 31 displayed)
  1. Disconnect the K1 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and BLU) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the motor contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.

* A vacuum leak below the waterline will create turbulence in the recovery tank, causing water to enter the vacuum motor(s).

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 96, used with permission. SES ref PF-2YAZ-VIB2‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‍⁠​‌‍‍‌‌​‌‍‌‍‌‍​⁠‌‌‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 96 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Insufficient water pick-up

Good water pick up performance depends on the proper amount of air flowing through the squeegee pickup tool. Air entering the vacuum system before the pickup tool will reduce its ability to pick up water. Anything that restricts the movement of air through the system will also reduce its ability to pick up water.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​‍⁠‍‍‌‌‌‍​‍​‍‍‍​

Possible causes:

  • Damaged squeegees
  • Restricted air flow
    • Clogged or kinked squeegee vacuum hose
    • Clogged vacuum motor inlet or outlet port
  • Air leaks
    • Recovery tank lid gasket is not sealing
    • Cracked squeegee vacuum hose
    • Cracked recovery tank
  • Vacuum motor is weak

Troubleshooting steps

Begin with a good visual inspection of the system. Check the condition of the squeegees and the recovery hose. Take the recovery hose off and rinse it out. Check the recover tank cover gasket condition. Repair any problems found.

If no visual problems are found, test the system using a vacuum gauge PN 56205281 and open-hole adapter. (See the Special Tools Section below. The adapter can be made from a piece of PVC pipe.)

  1. Remove the vacuum hose from the squeegee tool.
  2. Hold the vacuum gauge against the end of the hose and turn on the vacuum motor. Note the reading on the gauge. If it is within 10% of specs, go to the next step. If it is too low, check for air leaks in the system.
Photo of a hand holding the vacuum water lift gauge against the end of the vacuum hose on the machine
Vacuum gauge held against the hose end
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 97, used with permission. SES ref PF-DVQC-YNAU‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​‍⁠‍‍‌‌‌‍​‍​‍‍‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 97 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Install a one inch open-hole adapter between the hose end and the vacuum gauge.
  2. Turn the vacuum motor on and measure the vacuum. If it is within 10% of the specs, the vacuum system is working properly. If the reading is too low, check for a restriction in the system.
Photo of a hand holding the vacuum gauge on top of a white pipe open-hole adapter that has a round hole in its side, attached to the hose end
Vacuum gauge with one inch open-hole adapter
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 98, used with permission. SES ref PF-UDYB-BHB6‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​​​⁠‌‍​‌‍⁠⁠‌‌​‌‍‌​⁠​⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 98 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

WARNING! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, disconnect the battery pack by pushing in the emergency-stop switch/battery disconnect, and make sure the parking brake is engaged.

Recovery tank

  1. Drain the recovery tank.
  2. Disconnect the squeegee hose from the squeegee tool, and from the top of the recovery tank (twist the hose to remove).

Note: Removing the squeegee tool at the mount will allow more room to maneuver when removing the recovery tank.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍​⁠‌‍‍‌‍⁠‍⁠​‌​‍‌​⁠‌‍‌​

  1. Disconnect the Vacuum Motor Wiring Connector located underneath the left rear bottom of the recovery tank.
Photo looking into the recovery tank cavity with a label and arrow pointing to the Vacuum Motor Wiring Connector beside the vacuum hose
Vacuum motor wiring connector
  1. Release the Tank Latch and tilt the tank toward the rear.
Photo of a hand releasing the Tank Latch on the side of the machine below the Nilfisk SC6500 label; a red arrow shows the pull direction
Tank latch
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 99, used with permission. SES ref PF-7EHL-FY4R‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍​⁠‌‍‍‌‍⁠‍⁠​‌​‍‌​⁠‌‍‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 99 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Disconnect the Tank Tether from the back of the operator seat.
CAUTION! Maintain a good grip on the recovery tank and control the tank as you lower it. Do not allow the tank to fall to the floor on its own.
Photo of the battery compartment behind the operator seat with a label and arrow pointing to the Tank Tether and its ring
Tank tether
  1. Carefully lower the tank to the floor level.
  2. Note that the tank is attached to the chassis by two pins. Lift up on the tank ends to separate and pull the tank free from the machine.
CAUTION! Be careful not to crush or damage the drain hose when pulling the tank from the chassis.
  1. To reinstall the tank:
  2. a. Align each side of the tank bracket with the chassis pins one at a time.
  3. b. Grip the opening of the tank cover at the rear and quickly lift up to set (engage) the tank in its upright position.
  4. c. Reconnect the Tank Tether to the back of the operator seat.
  5. d. Swing the tank up to the vertical position to reengage the Tank Latch.
  6. e. Reconnect the vacuum motor wiring connector and squeegee hose.

Vacuum motor

  1. Drain the recovery tank.
  2. Release the Tank Latch and tilt the tank to the rear.
Photo of a hand releasing the Tank Latch on the side of the machine below the Nilfisk SC6500 label; a red arrow shows the pull direction
Tank latch
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 100, used with permission. SES ref PF-PHCP-ZUIB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍‍​‌‌‌‍‌‌​​‌‍⁠‌⁠‍‍⁠‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 100 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Remove the five Screws from the Top Cover Assembly, then lift the Top Cover Assembly, straight up while guiding the float cage up through the opening in the recovery tank.
Drawing of the top cover assembly with labels pointing to one of the five screws (Screw (5)) and to the Top Cover Assembly
Top cover assembly screws
  1. Disconnect the Vacuum (exhaust) Hose from the Vacuum Motor.
  2. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the Vacuum Motor and lift the Vacuum Motor out from its mounting cavity.
  3. Inspect the following vacuum system gaskets and replace as necessary:
  4. Clean the vacuum motor Filter, Filter Screen and Vacuum (exhaust) Hose.
  5. Inspect the carbon motor brushes. If the carbon brushes are less than 3/8 in (10 mm) in length, replace the brushes.
  6. Reinstall the Vacuum Motor by following the above steps in reverse order.
Exploded drawing of the vacuum motor area with labels: Vacuum Filter Lid Gasket, Filter, Filter Screen, Vacuum Motor, RS Strip Gasket, Vacuum Fan Gaskets, Vacuum Fan Top Gasket and Vacuum (exhaust) Hose
Vacuum motor, gaskets and exhaust hose
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 101, used with permission. SES ref PF-IITS-TCGD‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‌‍‌‌⁠​⁠⁠​‌​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠​‌⁠‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 101 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

ComponentSpecifications
Vacuum Motor36 VDC, Insulation Class: A
Vacuum LiftOne Vacuum Motor(Sealed)68 in. H2O
(Open Hole Adapter 1 in)14 in. H2O
Two Vacuum Motors(Sealed)74 in. H2O
(Open Hole Adapter 1 in)27 in. H2O

Shop measurements

Shop measurements are values that were measured on a real machine. While they are not “specifications”, they can help you recognize normal vs abnormal.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​​​‌‍​‌‍⁠‍​‌‍‌⁠‌⁠⁠​‌‌

K1 vacuum contactor

Resistance at room temperature: 93 ohms

Vacuum motor

Current draw for one motor with open squeegee hose: 18.7 Amps

Special tools

Vacuum water lift gauge, Nilfisk-Advance part number 56205281
Photo of the vacuum water lift gauge, a round dial gauge on a black rubber cup
Vacuum water lift gauge
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 102, used with permission. SES ref PF-EWL3-QV6P‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​​​‌‍​‌‍⁠‍​‌‍‌⁠‌⁠⁠​‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 102 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Scrub system, cylindrical

Functional description

Overview

In shortThe SC6500 cylindrical models scrub with two counter-rotating cylindrical brushes that also sweep light debris into a removable hopper. The deck actuator raises and lowers the deck and automatically adjusts its height to hold the scrub pressure.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‌​‌⁠‍‍⁠‌‌‌‌‍‍⁠​‍‌‌‍‍

The SC6500 cylindrical scrub deck models use two cylindrical brushes that counter-rotate to sweep up light debris into a removable hopper, and scrub at the same time. The two scrub brushes are powered on opposing ends by 1-1/2 HP permanent-magnet motors and drive belts.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‌​‌⁠‍‍⁠‌‌‌‌‍‍⁠​‍‌‌‍‍

The scrub deck actuator raises and lowers the scrub deck, and automatically adjusts the deck height while scrubbing to maintain the desired scrub pressure.

Cylindrical scrub system wiring diagram

Cylindrical scrub system wiring diagram showing the 36V battery, F4 fuse, A1 speed controller, K7, F1 and F2 circuit breakers, S1 key switch, D1 diode, S2 seat switch, S3 battery interlock switch, K5, the A2 control board assembly, the A3 switch/display panel assembly, K2 and K3 brush contactors, M2 brush actuator, S5 solution empty switch, R2 scrub deck sensing resistor and brush motors M9 and M10
Cylindrical scrub system wiring diagram
LabelPrinted text
F4Fuse, 250 A
(battery symbol)36V Battery
A1Speed Controller (connector pins marked 16, 15, 8, 4, 3; terminals marked B- and B+)
K7(no description printed)
F1Circuit Breaker, 3 Amp
S1Key Switch
D1Diode
S2Seat Switch
S3Battery Interlock Switch (for roll-out Battery)
K5(no description printed)
F2Circuit Breaker, 15 Amp
A2Control Board Assembly (terminals marked Bat - (three), Bat +, Motion Direction, CAN H, CAN L, J2-2; line marked Battery Ground)
A3Switch/Display Panel Assembly
K2 (coil)Right Brush Contactor
K3 (coil)Center Brush Contactor
K2 (contacts, terminals 1 and 2)Right Brush Contactor
K3 (contacts, terminals 1 and 2)Left Brush Contactor
M2Brush Actuator (leads marked RED and BLK)
S5Solution Empty Switch (closes when empty)
R2Scrub Deck Sensing Resistor (terminals 1 and 2): 10K Ohm for 40" Cyl.; 40K Ohm for 45" & 48" Cyl.
BRN(wire label next to A2 terminal J2-2)
M9Right Brush Motor
M10Left Brush Motor
B+Printed twice, at lower left
B-Printed at lower right
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 103, used with permission. SES ref PF-DJNI-TXNR‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‌​‌⁠‍‍⁠‌‌‌‌‍‍⁠​‍‌‌‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 103 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Circuit description

The coil sides of contactors K2 and K3 get positive voltage from the Battery when the load side of contactor K5 is closed. Contactor K5 closes when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K5 coil to battery ground. Contactors K2 and K3 are connected to battery ground through the A2 Control Board Assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠​‍​⁠‌⁠‍​‍​‌⁠‌‌⁠​‌‌‌​‍

The Right Brush Motor M9 and Left Brush Motor M10 get positive voltage from the Battery when the load sides of contactors K2 and K3 are closed respectively. Contactors K2 and K3 close when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K2 and K3 coils to battery ground. The Right Brush Motor M9 and Left Brush Motor M10 are connected directly to battery ground.

The Brush Actuator M2 gets voltage from the A2 Control Board Assembly which switches the polarity to move the scrub deck up or down. When the A2 Control Board Assembly receives a signal from the A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly via the CAN BUS that the operator has pressed the scrub on switch, the A2 Control Board Assembly sends the appropriate voltage to the Brush Actuator M2 to lower the scrub deck to the operating position.

The Scrub Deck Sensing Resistor R2 senses the deck size so the operator does not need to program the deck size into the hidden menu.

As the brush motor current passes through the BRN current sense wire, which is in effect a low-value resistor, a small voltage drop is developed across it which is proportional to the motor current. This voltage change is inputted to pin J2-2 on the A2 Control Board Assembly. Any surrounding temperature change in the BRN current sense wire affects its resistance, so the temperature is sensed by a thermistor built into the A2 Control Board Assembly. This allows error correction for the temperature resistance changes in the BRN current sense wire. When A2 Control Board Assembly senses a current draw out of the desired range it automatically turns on the M2 actuator motor to raise or lower the scrub deck. This process is ongoing in maintaining the operator’s selected scrub motor current load setting to sustain the desired brush working pressure.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 104, used with permission. SES ref PF-IGCV-4OKW‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠​‍​⁠‌⁠‍​‍​‌⁠‌‌⁠​‌‌‌​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 104 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Component locations

The 1-1/2 HP permanent-magnet Scrub Motors drive Poly V Sheaves and Drive Belts that drive the broom drive lug assemblies coupled to the brushes.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‍‌⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠⁠‌​⁠

The Scrub Deck Actuator Assembly raises and lowers the scrub deck and automatically adjusts the deck height during scrubbing to maintain the correct scrub pressure.

The Hopper Assembly holds the dust and debris swept up by the scrub brushes, and can be removed for dumping and cleaning.

The Side Skirts direct the waste water to the squeegee and help keep the water confined within the cleaning path. The Side Skirt height is adjustable, and the Side Skirts can be removed for cleaning or replacement.

Drawing of the cylindrical scrub deck with labels: Scrub Deck Actuator Assembly, Scrub Motor (2), Poly V Sheave/Drive Belt (2) (under Belt Guard), Hopper Assembly and Side Skirt (2)
Scrub deck components
Photo of the electrical compartment with labels pointing to the K2 Contactor (Right Brush) and the K3 Contactor (Center Brush)
K2 and K3 brush contactors
Photo under the machine with labels pointing to the Deck Actuator and the R2 Resistor (Scrub Deck Sensing)
Deck actuator and R2 resistor
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 105, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZR4V-ZZDC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‍‌⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠⁠‌​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 105 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

WARNING! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

General scrub system maintenance

The scrubbing system must be serviced at regular intervals to maintain good scrubbing performance. Follow the maintenance steps listed below.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠‌‍⁠‍​‌​​​​‍⁠‌‍​‍‌​‍⁠​

Daily maintenance

  • Dump the sweeping debris from the hopper.
  • Rinse and clean any built-up debris from the hopper drain holes.

Weekly maintenance

  • Clean the drain holes in the solution delivery trough on top of the scrub deck.
  • Clean any built-up dirt from the inside of the scrub brush housing.
  • Remove any string wrapped around the scrub brushes, drive hubs and idler hubs.
  • Remove both the scrub brushes and rotate end-for-end. Refer to the Removal and Installation/Scrub Brushes section.

Monthly maintenance

  • Inspect the scrub brush bristles for wear, the brushes should be replaced when the bristle length is 1 in (26 mm) or less.

Scrub brush belt replacement

The drive belt is a “stretch” belt. There is no tension adjustment. The belt is rolled on and off the pulleys.

  1. Remove the Side Skirt Assembly on the side needing belt replacement.
  2. Remove the two hex nuts (10 mm socket) and Phillips screw holding the Belt Guard, then remove the Belt Guard.
Drawing of the scrub deck with labels: Belt Guard, Stretch Belt and Side Skirt Assembly (shown removed)
Stretch belt, belt guard and side skirt assembly
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 106, used with permission. SES ref PF-P7XW-T4VA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠‌‍⁠‍​‌​​​​‍⁠‌‍​‍‌​‍⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 106 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Use a 1/2 in drive extension and ratchet in the large pulley slot, to rotate the pulley while pulling outward on the belt to roll the belt off of the pulleys.
Photo of a hand pulling the belt outward while a ratchet turns the large pulley to roll the belt off
Rolling the belt off the pulleys
  1. Place the new belt on the large pulley and then use a plastic wire tie to hold the belt on the pulley.
Photo of the new belt placed on the large pulley and held with a plastic wire tie
New belt held on the large pulley
  1. Loop the belt over the small pulley and hold it on.
  2. Use a 1/2 in drive extension and ratchet in the large pulley slot, to rotate the pulley to roll the belt onto the pulley.
Photo of a hand holding the belt over the small pulley while a ratchet turns the large pulley to roll the belt on
Rolling the belt onto the pulleys
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 107, used with permission. SES ref PF-RGM5-4W6P‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌‌⁠‌‌⁠⁠‌⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 107 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. If the belt is not seated properly in the pulley grooves, gently push or pull in the direction that the belt must move while rotating the belt.
  2. Reinstall the Belt Guard and Side Skirt Assembly, then test the scrub system for correct operation.
Two photos of the belt on the pulley: the left labeled Belt Not Seated and the right labeled Belt Seated
Belt not seated and belt seated

Lift actuator adjustment

In shortThis adjustment sets where the actuator drive nut stops when the travel limit switches open, so the deck can reach the scrubbing position and the transport position. It needs the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and the machine’s battery pack. The target nut distances are on page 110.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠​‌⁠‍​​⁠‍‌‌‍‌​​

The lift actuator adjustment makes sure that the deck can be properly positioned when extended for scrubbing operations and when retracted for machine transport. The adjustment sets the position of the drive nut on the actuator lead screw when either of the internal travel limit switches open in order to stop the motor rotation. The retracted position is set by running the motor in the retracted position until the motor stops and then screwing the drive nut onto the lead screw until it is in the correct location. Once the retracted position is established, the extended position is set by adjusting an internal cam under the rubber cover of the actuator motor.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠​‌⁠‍​​⁠‍‌‌‍‌​​

Using the actuator power cord adapter

The adjacent drawing shows the special actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) that is needed to connect the machine’s battery pack and actuator motor for setting the actuator drive nut limit settings. To connect the actuator power cord adapter:

Drawing of the actuator power cord adapter: a cable with a rocker switch housing and a motor connector at one end, and two alligator clips at the other end
Actuator power cord adapter
  1. Open the machine battery compartment and disconnect the battery connector. The battery pack is needed to power the scrub deck actuator motor to correctly set the IN and OUT limit switches.
  2. Connect the actuator motor to be tested to the power cord adapter end.
  3. Connect the alligator clips from the cord adapter (red clip to the positive and black to negative) to battery connector or battery posts. Use the rocker switch on the actuator power cord adapter to change the motor rotation when setting the correct actuator drive nut dimensions.

Service Note: You can also use the above actuator power cord adapter to help position the drive nut/spring housing assembly (in or out) for ease in actuator motor installations.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 108, used with permission. SES ref PF-7FTS-NAVS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠​‌⁠‍​​⁠‍‌‌‍‌​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 108 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Lift actuator drive nut adjustment

This procedure sets the relative position between the drive nut on the actuator lead screw and the base of the actuator motor assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌​​‍⁠​‍‌‌⁠​​‌⁠‍‍

  1. Make a note of how the actuator housing assembly should be mounted on the machine.
Two exploded drawings of the actuator mounting. Left: Actuator Orientation for 40 in Disk and Cylindrical Decks. Right: Actuator Orientation for 45 in and 48 in Disk and Cylindrical Decks
Actuator orientation by deck size

Left drawing: actuator orientation for 40 in disk and cylindrical decks. Right drawing: actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disk and cylindrical decks.

  1. Familiarize yourself with the actuator assembly pieces and the assembly order of the springs, drive nut and spring housing. Refer to the photo below. If the housing and springs are already assembled, disassemble them.
Photo of the disassembled actuator with labels: Lower Spring (longer), Lead Screw, Nut Retainer, Pin, Upper Spring (shorter), Motor Housing, Spring Housing, Pin Hole, Drive Nut and Spring Cap
Actuator pieces and assembly order
  1. Lubricate the lead screw threads using bearing grease.
  2. Install the spring cap into the upper spring. (The upper spring is shorter and lighter than the lower spring). Then install the upper spring and cap onto the lead screw with the cap toward the motor housing.
  3. Rotate the drive nut onto the lead screw threads a few turns with the pin hole away from the motor housing as shown in the above photo.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 109, used with permission. SES ref PF-6PNL-AGFH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌​​‍⁠​‍‌‌⁠​​‌⁠‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 109 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Hold the drive nut to prevent it from rotating, then using the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502), run the motor toward the retracted position until the motor stops. This establishes the location where the retracted travel limit switch opens. Now, rotate the nut on the lead screw until the distance between the nut and the motor housing is 1 3/4 in (4.5 cm).
Photo of the actuator with a tape measure showing the drive nut about 1 3/4 in from the motor housing in the retracted position
Retracted position measurement
  1. Hold the drive nut to prevent it from rotating, then using the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502), run the motor toward the extended position until the motor stops. This establishes the location where the extended travel limit switch opens.
  2. a. Measure the distance between the nut on the lead screw and the motor housing. It should be 5 1/2 in (14 cm).
Photo of the actuator with a tape measure showing the drive nut about 5 1/2 in from the motor housing in the extended position
Extended position measurement
  1. b. If the distance is not correct, remove the rubber cam adjuster cover with a screwdriver in the motor housing to gain access to the cam adjustment.
Two photos of the end of the actuator motor housing: the left labeled Cam Adjuster Cover (the rubber cover in place) and the right labeled Cam Adjustment Location (cover removed)
Cam adjuster cover and cam adjustment location
  1. c. Rotate the cam using a 1/2 in or 13 mm socket (Not a screw driver!). Each click of the cam position will change the drive nut distance by about 1/16 in (1.6 mm). Rotate the cam clockwise to increase the distance and counterclockwise to decrease the distance.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 110, used with permission. SES ref PF-2M7C-RQNQ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠‌‍‍​‍‍⁠‌‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‍‌‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 110 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Recheck the retracted and extended position adjustments by holding on to the drive nut to prevent it from rotating and driving the motor to each limit position using the actuator power cord adapter. Repeat adjustments until correct.
  2. Once the drive nut adjustment is complete, finish assembling the spring housing being careful not to turn the drive nut.
    • a. Install the lower spring onto the lead screw.
    • b. Install the housing over the lead screw, springs and drive nut. Align the slotted holes in the housing with the pin holes in the drive nut.
Two photos: the lower spring, drive nut and lead screw laid out before the spring is installed, and the spring housing with its slotted holes aligned over the drive nut
Fig. 111-a
  • c. Install the two nut retainers; inserting their pins into the drive nut pin holes. Secure the two nut retainers together using two screws.
Three photos of installing the nut retainers: the pin and pin hole labeled, a retainer being fastened with a screw, and the retainer secured around the housing
Fig. 111-b
  • d. Slightly compress the upper spring and install the 4 spring housing retaining screws. You can compress the spring by holding the assembly on a stable surface and pushing down on the housing or by using a small “pry bar” through the retaining screw holes. Be careful that the screws go above the spring cap and do not damage it!
Two photos of the spring housing: a pry bar through the retaining screw holes with the four retaining screws labeled, and the spring cap and four retaining screws labeled
Fig. 111-c
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 111, used with permission. SES ref PF-D7VI-GIIR‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌​⁠​⁠‌​​​‌‍‌⁠‌‌⁠​⁠‍⁠​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 111 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Reinstall the Cam Adjuster Cover.
  2. After adjusting the actuator Spring Housing Assembly dimensions, refer to the Removal and Installation/Scrub Deck Lift Actuator section to reassemble it in the machine. Refer to the adjacent drawing to correctly mount the top of actuator motor to the chassis by model size.
Two exploded drawings of the lift actuator and its upper mounting bracket on the chassis. Left: actuator orientation for 40 in disc and cylindrical decks. Right: actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disc and cylindrical decks.
Fig. 112-a
  • Actuator orientation for 40 in disc and cylindrical decks (left drawing)
  • Actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disc and cylindrical decks (right drawing)

Service Note: Note the correct orientation of the Spring Housing Assembly when installing the complete motor assembly and also run the Spring Housing Assembly to the Retracted (in) position before you install it in the machine.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‌​‌‍​⁠‍‌‍‌​‍⁠​​‌⁠

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 112, used with permission. SES ref PF-SWPE-GGM3‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‌​‌‍​⁠‍‌‍‌​‍⁠​​‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 112 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Side skirt replacement and adjustment

In shortWhen the side skirt blades wear, a little water leaks out under the side skirts. Loosen the Retainer Knobs and turn the Height Adjusting Knobs to lower the blades, or turn or replace the blades. Replace the blades as a set if all four edges are nicked, torn or worn beyond their ability to be adjusted.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‍⁠‍‌

During normal use the side skirt blades will wear in time. The operator will notice a small amount of water leaking out underneath the side skirts. You can easily adjust the side skirt height to lower the blades to allow the squeegee to pick up the water more effectively.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‍⁠‍‌

To reverse or replace the scrub system side skirt blade(s):

Exploded drawings of the side skirt assembly on the scrub deck. Labels: Retainer Knob (2), Height Adjusting Knob (2), Side Skirt Assembly, Bracket Weldment, Thumb Nut (typical), Skirt Strap, Knob (typical), Skirt Blade. A skirt blade edge diagram numbers the four working edges 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Fig. 113-a
  1. Loosen the two side skirt Retainer Knobs (two per side) and remove the Side Skirt Assemblies from the scrub deck. Remove the Side Skirt Assemblies by first sliding them forward, then pulling them off.
  2. Remove all the hardware that holds the Skirt Blades to the Bracket Weldments. Note that the Skirt Blade is held on with tool-less retainers. Simply loosen the large Thumb Nuts, then turn the Knobs on the outside of the Skirt Strap until they are horizontal, then push them through the slots.
  3. The main Skirt Blade has four working edges as shown. Turn the Skirt Blade so a clean, undamaged edge faces toward the center of the machine. Replace the Skirt Blades as a set if all four edges are nicked, torn or worn beyond their ability to be adjusted.
  4. Reinstall the Side Skirt Assemblies onto the machine and check the height of the Skirt Blades for correct contact on the floor when the brush deck is lowered to the scrub position. The Skirt Blades should fold over just enough when scrubbing that all the waste water is contained inside the skirting. If necessary, adjust the height of the Side Skirt Assemblies as follows:
    • a. Loosen the Retainer Knobs.
    • b. Rotate the Height Adjusting Knobs to raise or lower the Side Skirt Assembly as necessary.
    • c. When the Skirt Blade contact is correct, tighten the Retainer Knobs.

Note: Make small adjustments to obtain good blade wiping. Do not lower the blades too much to where they fold over excessively as this can cause excessive blade wear.

Parts for this job
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 113, used with permission. SES ref PF-3CGM-POGX‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‍⁠‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 113 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

In shortThis table lists the scrub system error codes and what to check. Codes 01, 04, 06, 07, 21, 24 and 25 are on this page and codes 26, 27, 08 and 28 are on the next page. For the coil checks, replace the coil if it reads below 75 ohms; the nominal coil resistance is 94 ohms.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍⁠‌‍⁠‌​⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠‌‍‍‍‍​‍
ProblemCauseCorrection
The scrub system will not operateScrub deck sense R2 resistor fault (error code 01 displayed)Scrub deck sensor resistor is unplugged or damaged.
  1. Check the resistor wiring for an open.
  2. Substitute a new resistor and test the scrub deck for correct operation.
Note that there are four different resistor values used on the different deck types. See the electrical diagram decal for the correct specification of the resistor to replace.
Scrub motor overload (error code 04 displayed)
  1. Check for binding in the rotation of the brushes and incorrect brush deck lift actuator operation.
  2. Check the negative supply cable at the brush motor for a wiring problem, and also the small BRN current sense wire in the harness and A2 pin J2-2.
  3. Check for a short circuit in the brush motor or wiring. Check for excessive belt tension and the condition of the idler bearing.
Center brush motor contactor coil overload (error code 06 displayed)
  1. Check for a K3 coil wiring problem or a short circuit (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
Note that the nominal coil resistance is 94 ohms for both motor contactors.
Right brush motor contactor coil overload (error code 07 displayed)
  1. Check for a K2 coil wiring problem or a short circuit* (wire colors VIO & YEL/BLU).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
Scrub motor open (error code 21 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  2. Check for 36 volts at the scrub motor that is not running. If you get 0 Volts, replace the brush motor contactor.
Center brush motor contactor coil open (error code 24 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the K3 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO).
  2. Test for 36V at the K3 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
Center brush motor contactor coil short to ground (error code 25 displayed)
  1. Disconnect the K3 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • −− If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • −− If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 114, used with permission. SES ref PF-7OWN-D3SH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍⁠‌‍⁠‌​⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠‌‍‍‍‍​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 114 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
ProblemCauseCorrection
The scrub system will not operate (continued)Right brush motor contactor coil open (error code 26 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the K2 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/BLU).
  2. Test for 36V at the K2 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
Right brush motor contactor coil short to ground (error code 27 displayed)
  1. Disconnect the K2 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/BLU) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • −− If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • −− If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
The scrub deck actuator doesn’t raise or lower the scrub deckScrub deck actuator overload (error code 08 displayed)
  • Normal current load is 1-3 amps.
  • Max current load is 6 amps.
  • Max current with no load is 1.4 amps.
  1. Check for binding or a frozen brush lift linkage and excessive weight on the brush deck.
  2. Check for a short circuit in the actuator motor and wiring. Repair or replace.
To test the actuator, disconnect the motor plug and attach the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and perform an amp draw test. Compare readings to the current load specifications to the left.
Scrub deck actuator open (error code 28 displayed)
  1. Check for disconnected lift actuator wiring.
  2. Check for an open circuit in the motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  3. Check for output voltage from the A2 control board assembly at the actuator wiring plug. It should be 36 volts. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 115, used with permission. SES ref PF-B4AK-LAU6‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌​‍‌‍‌‌‍​‍​‌⁠​‍​​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 115 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

WARNING! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off, key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
In shortThis chapter covers taking out the scrub brushes, the scrub brush deck, the deck lift actuator and a scrub brush motor. For every job here, make sure the key switch is off, the key is out and the parking brake is on.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‍‌​‌​​​‍​‌⁠⁠‍‍‌‌​​‍⁠‌

Scrub brushes

Exploded drawing of the cylindrical scrub deck showing the brush, the Broom Idler Assembly, Thumb Nut, Retainer Knob (2), Side Skirt Assembly and a close-up of the Notches the idler engages.
Fig. 116-a
  1. Make sure the scrub deck is in the raised position and the key switch is off.
  2. Loosen the Retainer Knobs, then slide the Side Skirt Assembly forward slightly, then off of the scrub deck.
  3. Loosen the Thumb Nut on top of the Broom Idler Assembly until the Broom Idler Assembly drops down far enough to disengage it from the Notches, then remove the Broom Idler Assembly.
  4. Remove the Brush from the housing.
  5. To reinstall a Brush, slide it into the housing, lift it slightly, then push and turn the Brush until it seats.
  6. Reinstall the Broom Idler Assembly and Side Skirt Assembly.
Parts for this job
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 116, used with permission. SES ref PF-G5TM-GJ7O‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‍‌​‌​​​‍​‌⁠⁠‍‍‌‌​​‍⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 116 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Scrub brush deck

WARNING! Engage the parking brake and chock both rear wheels so the machine can’t roll.
Drawing of the cylindrical scrub brush deck with labels: Cotter Hair Pin, Scrub Deck Actuator, Solution Feed Hose, Spring Housing Assembly, Retainer Pin, Hopper, ID Resistor Plug, Retainer Knob (4), Side Skirt Assembly, Hex Nut (4), Pivot Support Arm (4).
Fig. 117-a
  1. Loosen the four side skirt Retainer Knobs (two per side) and remove the Side Skirt Assemblies from the deck.
  2. Slide out the Hopper.
  3. With the scrub brushes installed in the deck, press the Scrub On button to lower the deck to the floor.

Service Note: Once the brush deck is in the lowered position, don’t turn the key switch off until you disconnect the battery pack (push in the Emergency Disconnect). This will prevent the scrub deck from automatically rising when the key is turned off.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​⁠‌⁠‌​‌‌‍‌‍⁠​‌​​​‌‍⁠‍​

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Remove the Solution Feed Hose at the solution solenoid valve located underneath the left side of the machine ahead of the rear wheel.
  3. Remove bottom lift actuator Cotter Hair Pin, then push the Retainer Pin from its housing and mount bracket holes.
  4. Disconnect the actuator wire harness connector. Note that this will prevent the actuator from being switched on and rising when it is disconnected from its deck mount.

Service Note: Connect the Advance power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) to the lift motor harness, then position (relieve the pressure on) the Retainer Pin for ease of removal.

  1. Note the correct brush motor wire connections at each individual motor, then remove all the wiring from the motor terminals.
  2. Locate the ID (identification) Resistor Plug on the scrub brush deck and separate its connector.
  3. Remove the four Hex Nuts, hex screws and bushings from the left and right front deck supports, then swing the Pivot Support Arms away from their mounting holes.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 117, used with permission. SES ref PF-EZ5S-WVMC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​⁠‌⁠‌​‌‌‍‌‍⁠​‌​​​‌‍⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 117 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Service Note: Removing both the left and right side brooms and both front chassis corner rollers will allow easier access to the mounting hardware on the four front scrub deck support arms.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠⁠‌​‌‍​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​⁠‍⁠‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠

WARNING! Safely jack up the front of the machine 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38-50 mm) and put a wood block (2 x 4) underneath the drive wheel for a safety support.
  1. Run the Scrub Deck Actuator to its retracted (up) position to get the clearance needed to pull the scrub deck assembly out from underneath the machine.

Service Note: Connect the power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) to the actuator motor and use the adapter to shorten the Scrub Deck Actuator length. Hold the Spring Housing Assembly when you run the Scrub Deck Actuator motor to maintain the correct retracted and extended position settings. See the Lift Actuator Adjustment section in this manual for additional details.

An alternate method to get the needed actuator clearance to slide the deck out from under the machine would be to safely jack up the front of the machine.

WARNING! Support both front corners with adequate jack stands or blocking before working underneath the machine.
  1. Carefully slide the complete deck assembly out from underneath the machine from either side.

Note: Observe the position of the disconnected lift actuator housing and swing it to the rear to clear its mount bracket pocket.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 118, used with permission. SES ref PF-LQRA-BDND‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠⁠‌​‌‍​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​⁠‍⁠‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 118 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Scrub deck lift actuator

Note: All new replacement actuator motors are not shipped with the lift nut pre-adjusted for any specific machine model application.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‍⁠‌‍⁠​‌‍​⁠‌‌⁠​⁠‍‍‍‍​​‍

Note: The scrub deck must be removed to access the top mount bracket on the scrub deck lift motor.

Two exploded drawings of the lift actuator and its upper mounting bracket, with the Cotter Hair Pin and Mount Pin labeled. Left: actuator orientation for 40 in disk and cylindrical decks. Right: actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disk and cylindrical decks.
Fig. 119-a
  1. Remove the scrub deck by following the steps in the Scrub Brush Deck section.
  2. Locate and remove the upper Cotter Hair Pin from underneath the middle of the machine.
  3. Slide the actuator Mount Pin from the housing and frame mounting bracket holes allowing the motor to drop down completing its removal.
  4. Refer to the Drive Nut Adjustment section for instructions on how to install a new drive nut and set the extended and retracted positions.
  5. Install the scrub deck actuator by following the above steps in reverse order.
  • Actuator orientation for 40 in disc and cylindrical decks (left drawing)
  • Actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disc and cylindrical decks (right drawing)

Service Note: You can use the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) to help position (extend or retract) the lift actuator housing for ease in installing the bottom Mount (clevis) Pin.

Parts for this job
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 119, used with permission. SES ref PF-QGRT-M2FJ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‍⁠‌‍⁠​‌‍​⁠‌‌⁠​⁠‍‍‍‍​​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 119 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Scrub brush motor

Note: It is not necessary to remove the complete scrub deck assembly from the machine to service an individual scrub brush motor.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​‌‌‍⁠‌​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌‍​⁠​⁠‍‍⁠

Exploded drawing of the cylindrical scrub deck showing the Hopper, Scrub Motor, Screw (4), Belt Guard and Side Skirt Assembly.
Fig. 120-a
  1. Remove the Side Skirt Assembly on the side of the deck that needs the scrub motor replaced.
  2. Slide out the Hopper.
  3. With the scrub brushes installed in the deck, press the Scrub On button to lower the deck to the floor.

Service Note: Once the brush deck is in the lowered position, don’t turn the key switch off until you disconnect the battery pack (push in the Emergency Disconnect). This will prevent the scrub deck from automatically rising when the key is turned off.

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Remove the two hex nuts (0.39 in socket, 10 mm) and Phillips screw holding the Belt Guard and remove the Belt Guard.
  3. Remove the four motor mount Screws holding the Scrub Motor to its deck mount. Also note that the Scrub Motor may stick to the motor mount, so be careful and watch your fingers as the motor will drop.
  4. Turn the Scrub Motor clockwise to access the motor terminal studs. Note the wire connections for correct reassembly, then remove both motor wires.
  5. Lower the deck assembly to the deck actuator’s maximum down position (travel) to get the clearance needed to remove the motor from the machine. You can do this either of two ways:
    • Reconnect the battery, then lower the scrub deck in the service test mode. (Refer to the Control System/Service Test Mode section.)
    • Connect the actuator power cord adapter to the deck actuator motor and run (lower) the deck housing. (Refer to the Drive Nut Adjustment section for details.)
  6. Pull and push the Scrub Motor back toward the rear of the machine to clear the chassis supports and remove it at the Hopper.
  7. To install a Scrub Brush Motor:
    • a. Follow the above steps in reverse order with the exception that the drive belt tension must be reduced to allow the installation of the four motor mount Screws.
    • b. Refer to the Scrub Brush Belt Replacement section and follow the instructions on how to replace or tension the belt.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 120, used with permission. SES ref PF-32LS-LDQC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​‌‌‍⁠‌​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌‍​⁠​⁠‍‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 120 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

In shortThese are the printed motor ratings for the cylindrical scrub system: the scrub brush motor is 36 VDC, 1100 Watt, 2200 RPM and 30 Amps, and the deck actuator motor is 36 VDC. The shop measurements below are values from a real machine, not specifications.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‌⁠‌‌​‍⁠⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‍
ComponentSpecifications
Scrub Brush MotorVoltage – 36 VDC
Power – 1100 Watt
Speed – 2200 RPM
Current – 30 Amps
UP Rating – 55
Deck Actuator MotorType – permanent magnet, 36 VDC, 1/5 HP, reversible
Motor-to-drive-screw ratio – 19.1:1
Performance Data
No Load – Thrust 0 lbs., Speed 36 ±4 in/min, 1.0 ±0.5 Amps
Full Load – Thrust 600 lbs., Speed 29 ±3 in/min, 5.0 ±1 Amps
Stall Current – 25 Amps max.
Start Thrust – 600 lbs. min.

Shop measurements

Shop measurements are values that were measured on a real machine. While they are not “specifications”, they can help you recognize normal vs abnormal.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‌⁠‌‌​‍⁠⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‍

Brush contactor (K2, K3 or K4)

Resistance at room temperature: 93 ohms

Scrub brush motor

  • 40C and 1100C deck with no load (brushes out): Not measured
  • 45C deck with no load (brushes out): 6.1-6 Amps
  • 45C deck working on dry epoxy floor: 25-45 Amps
  • 48C 1300C deck not measured
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 121, used with permission. SES ref PF-CUUK-JVTW‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‌⁠‌‌​‍⁠⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 121 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Brush actuator motor

  • 45 inch cylindrical deck
    • Current draw going up: 3.5-4.0 Amps
    • Current draw going down: 1.2-2.2 Amps

Special tools

Drawing of the actuator power cord adapter, p/n 56407502: a cord with a plug end and two alligator clips.
Fig. 122-a

Actuator Power Cord Adapter, p/n 56407502‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌⁠‌⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌​‍​⁠‌‍

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 122, used with permission. SES ref PF-T3FT-MLLH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌⁠‌⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌​‍​⁠‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 122 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Scrub system, disc

Functional description

Overview

In shortThe SC6500 disc models use rotary brushes: the 40 in decks have two brushes powered by one 3 HP motor/gearbox assembly, and the 45 in and 48 in decks have three brushes, each with its own 1-1/2 HP motor/gearbox assembly. The deck lift actuator raises and lowers the deck and adjusts its height while scrubbing to hold the scrub pressure.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌

The SC6500 disc models use rotary brushes powered by permanent-magnet motors and gearbox assemblies. The 40” decks have two scrub brushes that are both powered by one 3 HP motor/gearbox assembly. The 45” and 48” decks have three brushes, each powered by a separate 1-1/2 HP motor/gearbox assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌

The scrub deck lift actuator raises and lowers the scrub deck, and automatically adjusts the deck height while scrubbing to maintain the desired scrub pressure.

Disc scrub system wiring diagram

Wiring diagram of the disc scrub system: 36V battery and 250 A fuse, A1 speed controller, K7, circuit breakers F1 and F2, key switch S1, diode D1, seat switch S2, battery interlock switch S3, K5, A2 control board assembly, A3 switch/display panel assembly, brush actuator M2, solution empty switch S5, scrub deck sensing resistor R2, contactors K2, K3, K4 and brush motors M9, M10, M11.
Disc scrub system wiring diagram
ReferenceLabel as printed on the drawing
F4Fuse, 250 A
36V Battery+ and − terminals as drawn
A1 Speed Controllerterminals B-, B+ and numbered pins 16, 15, 8, 4, 3
K7(no other label printed)
F1Circuit Breaker, 3 Amp
S1Key Switch
D1Diode
S2Seat Switch
S3Battery Interlock Switch (for roll-out Battery)
K5(no other label printed)
F2Circuit Breaker, 15 Amp
A2 Control Board AssemblyBat +, Bat -, Motion Direction, CAN H, CAN L, J2-2 (wire label BRN); Battery Ground line
A3Switch/Display Panel Assembly
M2Brush Actuator (leads RED and BLK)
S5Solution Empty Switch (closes when empty)
R2Scrub Deck Sensing Resistor (terminals 1 and 2): 1K Ohm for 40" Disc; 20K Ohm for 45" & 48" Disc
K2Right Brush Contactor (printed twice on the drawing)
K3Center Brush Contactor (printed twice on the drawing)
K4Left Brush Contactor (printed twice on the drawing)
M9Right Brush Motor; terminal notes printed: (+ on 40" Disc) and (- on 40" Disc )
M10Center Brush Motor
M11Left Brush Motor (three-motor decks)
B+ / B-B+ printed twice at left (one above the lower-left corner); B- printed at lower right
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 123, used with permission. SES ref PF-JH5V-V5PG‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 123 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Circuit description

The coil sides of contactors K2, K3 and K4 get positive voltage from the Battery when the load side of contactor K5 is closed. Contactor K5 closes when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K5 coil to battery ground. Contactors K2, K3 and K4 are connected to battery ground through the A2 Control Board Assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌⁠‌​⁠‌​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠​‍​‍‍‌‌

The Right Brush Motor M9, Center Brush Motor M10 and Left Brush Motor M11 get positive voltage from the Battery when the load sides of contactors K2, K3 and K4 are closed respectively. Contactors K2, K3 and K4 close when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K2, K3 and K4 coils to battery ground. The Right Brush Motor M9, Center Brush Motor M10 and Left Brush Motor M11 are connected directly to battery ground.

The Brush Actuator M2 gets voltage from the A2 Control Board Assembly which switches the polarity to move the scrub deck up or down. When the A2 Control Board Assembly receives a signal from the A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly via the CAN BUS that the operator has pressed the scrub on switch, the A2 Control Board Assembly sends the appropriate voltage to the Brush Actuator M2 to lower the scrub deck to the operating position.

The Scrub Deck Sensing Resistor R2 senses the deck size so the operator does not need to program the deck size into the hidden menu.

As the brush motor current passes through the BRN current sense wire, which is in effect a low-value resistor, a small voltage drop is developed across it which is proportional to the motor current. This voltage change is inputted to pin J2-2 on the A2 Control Board Assembly. Any surrounding temperature change in the BRN current sense wire affects its resistance, so the temperature is sensed by a thermistor built into the A2 Control Board Assembly. This allows error correction for the temperature resistance changes in the BRN current sense wire. When A2 Control Board Assembly senses a current draw out of the desired range it automatically turns on the M2 actuator motor to raise or lower the scrub deck. This process is ongoing in maintaining the operator’s selected scrub motor current load setting to sustain the desired brush working pressure.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 124, used with permission. SES ref PF-7AYE-U27O‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌⁠‌​⁠‌​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠​‍​‍‍‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 124 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Component locations

On the 45” and 48” decks, three 1-1/2 HP Gearmotors drive the scrub brushes directly. The 40” decks have a single 3 HP Gearmotor with two gearboxes (one on either end) that power the two scrub brushes.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌⁠‌​​⁠​​‍‍‌​‍​‍⁠‌​‌​‌‌

The Scrub Deck Actuator Assembly raises and lowers the scrub deck, and automatically adjusts the deck height during scrubbing to maintain the correct scrub pressure.

The Side Skirts direct the waste water to the squeegee and help keep the water confined within the cleaning path. The Side Skirt height is adjustable and the Side Skirts can be removed for cleaning or replacement.

Drawing of the disc scrub deck with labels: Scrub Deck Actuator Assembly, Gearmotor (3), Side Skirt (2).
Fig. 125-a
Photo inside the machine with labels: Scrub Motor and Scrub Deck Sensing Resistor R2.
Fig. 125-b
Photo of the electrical compartment with labels: K2 Right Brush, K3 Center Brush, K4 Left Brush Location.
Fig. 125-c
Drawing of the contactor panel with labels: K1 Vacuum, K2 Right Brush, K3 Center Brush, K4 Left Brush, K5 Auxiliary, K6 Side Brooms, K7 Main.
Fig. 125-d
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 125, used with permission. SES ref PF-AZ7C-DOQO‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌⁠‌​​⁠​​‍‍‌​‍​‍⁠‌​‌​‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 125 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

WARNING! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

Lift actuator adjustment

The lift actuator adjustment makes sure that the deck can be properly positioned when extended for scrubbing operations and when retracted for machine transport. The adjustment sets the position of the drive nut on the actuator lead screw when either of the internal travel limit switches open in order to stop the motor rotation. The retracted position is set by running the motor in the retracted position until the motor stops and then screwing the drive nut onto the lead screw until it is in the correct location. Once the retracted position is established, the extended position is set by adjusting an internal cam under the rubber cover of the actuator motor.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‍‍‌⁠​​‍‍​‌​​‍‍​‍​⁠‌‍‍

Using the actuator power cord adapter

The adjacent drawing shows the special actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) that is needed to connect the machine’s battery pack and actuator motor for setting the actuator drive nut limit settings. To connect the actuator power cord adapter:

Drawing of the actuator power cord adapter, p/n 56407502: a cord with a plug end, a rocker switch and two alligator clips.
Fig. 126-a
  1. Open the machine battery compartment and disconnect the battery connector. The battery pack is needed to power the scrub deck actuator motor to correctly set the IN and OUT limit switches.
  2. Connect the actuator motor to be tested to the power cord adapter end.
  3. Connect the alligator clips from the cord adapter (red clip to the positive and black to negative) to battery connector or battery posts. Use the rocker switch on the actuator power cord adapter to change the motor rotation when setting the correct actuator drive nut dimensions.

Service Note: You can also use the above actuator power cord adapter to help position the drive nut/spring housing assembly (in or out) for ease in actuator motor installations.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 126, used with permission. SES ref PF-L4JS-YMK7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‍‍‌⁠​​‍‍​‌​​‍‍​‍​⁠‌‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 126 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Lift actuator drive nut adjustment

In shortThis procedure sets the position of the drive nut on the lift actuator lead screw. With the actuator power cord adapter, the nut-to-motor-housing distance is set to 1 3/4 in (4.5 cm) retracted and 5 1/2 in (14 cm) extended, as printed on page 128.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‍‌⁠‌​⁠‍​‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠‍​⁠‌​‌

This procedure sets the relative position between the drive nut on the actuator lead screw and the base of the actuator motor assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‍‌⁠‌​⁠‍​‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠‍​⁠‌​‌

  1. Make a note of how the actuator housing assembly should be mounted on the machine.
Two exploded drawings of the lift actuator and its upper mounting bracket on the chassis. Left: actuator orientation for 40 in disc and cylindrical decks. Right: actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disc and cylindrical decks.
Fig. 127-a
  • Actuator orientation for 40 in disc and cylindrical decks (left drawing)
  • Actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disc and cylindrical decks (right drawing)
  1. Familiarize yourself with the actuator assembly pieces an the assembly order of the springs, drive nut and spring housing. Refer to the photo below. If the housing and springs are already assembled, disassemble them.
Photo of the disassembled actuator with labels: Spring Housing, Lower Spring (longer), Lead Screw, Nut Retainer, Pin, Pin Hole, Drive Nut, Spring Cap, Upper Spring (shorter), Motor Housing.
Fig. 127-b
  1. Lubricate the lead screw threads using bearing grease.
  2. Install the spring cap into the upper spring. (The upper spring is shorter and lighter than the lower spring). Then install the upper spring and cap onto the lead screw with the cap toward the motor housing.
  3. Rotate the drive nut onto the lead screw threads a few turns with the pin hole away from the motor housing as shown in the above photo.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 127, used with permission. SES ref PF-TPKV-42PN‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‍‌⁠‌​⁠‍​‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠‍​⁠‌​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 127 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Hold the drive nut to prevent it from rotating, then using the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502), run the motor toward the retracted position until the motor stops. This establishes the location where the retracted travel limit switch opens. Now, rotate the nut on the lead screw until the distance between the nut and the motor housing is 1 3/4” (4.5 cm).
Photo of a tape measure along the lead screw from the drive nut to the motor housing, retracted position, 1 3/4 inches.
Fig. 128-a
  1. Hold the drive nut to prevent it from rotating, then using the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502), run the motor toward the extended position until the motor stops. This establishes the location where the extended travel limit switch opens.
    • a. Measure the distance between the nut on the lead screw and the motor housing. It should be 5 1/2 inches (14 cm).
Photo of a tape measure along the lead screw from the drive nut to the motor housing, extended position, 5 1/2 inches.
Fig. 128-b
  • b. If the distance is not correct, remove the rubber cam adjuster cover with a screwdriver in the motor housing to gain access to the cam adjustment.
Two photos of the actuator motor end: the Cam Adjuster Cover, and the Cam Adjustment Location with the cover removed.
Fig. 128-c
  • c. Rotate the cam using a 1/2 in (13 mm) socket (Not a screw driver!). Each click of the cam position will change the drive nut distance by about 1/16” (1.6mm). Rotate the cam clockwise to increase the distance and counterclockwise to decrease the distance.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 128, used with permission. SES ref PF-DN2C-L4L7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠‍‌‌‌⁠​⁠‍​⁠‌‍⁠⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 128 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Recheck the retracted and extended position adjustments by holding on to the drive nut to prevent it from rotating and driving the motor to each limit position using the actuator power cord adapter. Repeat adjustments until correct.
  2. Once the drive nut adjustment is complete, finish assembling the spring housing being careful not to turn the drive nut.
    • a. Install the lower spring onto the lead screw.
    • b. Install the housing over the lead screw, springs and drive nut. Align the slotted holes in the housing with the pin holes in the drive nut.
Two photos: the lower spring, drive nut and lead screw laid out before the spring is installed, and the spring housing with its slotted holes aligned over the drive nut
Fig. 129-a
  • c. Install the two nut retainers; inserting their pins into the drive nut pin holes. Secure the two nut retainers together using two screws.
Three photos of installing the nut retainers: the pin and pin hole labeled, a retainer being fastened with a screw, and the retainer secured around the housing
Fig. 129-b
  • d. Slightly compress the upper spring and install the 4 spring housing retaining screws. You can compress the spring by holding the assembly on a stable surface and pushing down on the housing or by using a small “pry bar” through the retaining screw holes. Be careful that the screws go above the spring cap and do not damage it!
Two photos of the spring housing: a pry bar through the retaining screw holes with the four retaining screws labeled, and the spring cap and four retaining screws labeled
Fig. 129-c
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 129, used with permission. SES ref PF-6UNB-JYR6‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌⁠‍‌‍‍⁠‌⁠​​⁠​⁠‍‌⁠⁠‌​‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 129 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. After each adjustment, hold the Spring Housing Assembly, run the actuator in and out and check both dimensions.
  2. Reinstall the Cam Adjuster Cover.
  3. After adjusting the actuator Spring Housing Assembly dimensions, refer to the Removal and Installation/Scrub Deck Lift Actuator section to reassemble it in the machine. Refer to the adjacent drawing to correctly mount the top of actuator motor to the chassis by model size.
Two exploded drawings of the lift actuator and its upper mounting bracket on the chassis. Left: actuator orientation for 40 in disc and cylindrical decks. Right: actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disc and cylindrical decks.
Fig. 130-a
  • Actuator orientation for 40 in disc and cylindrical decks (left drawing)
  • Actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disc and cylindrical decks (right drawing)

Service Note: Note the correct orientation of the Spring Housing Assembly when installing the complete motor assembly and also run the Spring Housing Assembly to the Retracted (in) position before you install it in the machine.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​⁠​‌​​​‍‌‌‌​⁠‍‌‍⁠​​‌​⁠

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 130, used with permission. SES ref PF-LD33-7CJO‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​⁠​‌​​​‍‌‌‌​⁠‍‌‍⁠​​‌​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 130 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Side skirt replacement and adjustment

In shortWhen the side skirt blades wear, a little water leaks out under the side skirts. Loosen the Retainer Knobs and turn the Height Adjusting Knobs to lower the blades, or turn or replace the blades. Replace the main Skirt Blades as a set if all four edges are nicked, torn or worn beyond their ability to be adjusted.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​⁠‍‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‍​⁠​​‌​​​‌⁠‍⁠

During normal use the side skirt blades will wear in time. The operator will notice a small amount of water leaking out underneath the side skirts. You can easily adjust the side skirt height to lower the blades to allow the squeegee to pick up the water more effectively.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​⁠‍‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‍​⁠​​‌​​​‌⁠‍⁠

To reverse or replace the scrub system side skirt blade(s):

Exploded drawings of the disc side skirt assembly. Labels: Front, Retainer Knob (2), Height Adjusting Knob (2), Side Skirt Assembly, Skirt Strap, Thumb Nut (typical), Knob (typical), Inside Blade, Skirt Blade, Skirt Weldment. A skirt blade edge diagram numbers the four working edges 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Fig. 131-a
  1. Loosen the two side skirt Retainer Knobs (two per side) and remove the Side Skirt Assemblies from the scrub deck. Remove the Side Skirt Assemblies by first sliding them forward, then pulling them off.
  2. Remove all the hardware that holds the Skirt Blades to the Skirt Weldments. Note that the Skirt Blade is held on with tool-less retainers. Simply loosen the large Thumb Nuts, then turn the Knobs on the outside of the Skirt Strap until they are horizontal, then push them through the slots. The small Inside Blade is held on by two screws and nuts and has two working edges.
  3. The main Skirt Blade has four working edges as shown. Turn the Skirt Blade so a clean, undamaged edge faces toward the center of the machine. Replace the Skirt Blades as a set if all four edges are nicked, torn or worn beyond their ability to be adjusted.
  4. Reinstall the Side Skirt Assemblies onto the machine and check the height of the Skirt Blades for correct contact on the floor when the brush deck is lowered to the scrub position. The Skirt Blades should fold over just enough when scrubbing that all the waste water is contained inside the skirting. If necessary, adjust the height of the Side Skirt Assemblies as follows:
    • a. Loosen the Retainer Knobs.
    • b. Rotate the Height Adjusting Knobs to raise or lower the Side Skirt Assembly as necessary.
    • c. When the Skirt Blade contact is correct, tighten the Retainer Knobs.

Note: Make small adjustments to obtain good blade wiping. Do not lower the blades too much to where they fold over excessively as this can cause excessive blade wear.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 131, used with permission. SES ref PF-5I7A-EBG6‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​⁠‍‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‍​⁠​​‌​​​‌⁠‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 131 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

In shortThis table starts the scrub system error codes for the disc models: 01, 04, 05, 06, 07 and 21 are on this page. For the coil checks, replace the coil if it reads below 75 ohms; the nominal coil resistance is 94 ohms for all three motor contactors.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‌‌​‌‍‍‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍‍‍‍​​
ProblemCauseCorrection
The scrub system will not operateScrub deck sense R2 resistor fault (error code 01 displayed)Scrub deck sensor resistor is unplugged or damaged.
  1. Check the resistor wiring for an open.
  2. Substitute a new resistor and test the scrub deck for correct operation.
Note that there are four different resistor values used on the different deck types. See the electrical diagram decal for the correct specification of the resistor to replace.
Scrub motor overload (error code 04 displayed)
  1. Check for binding in the rotation of the brushes and incorrect brush deck lift actuator operation.
  2. Check the negative supply cable at the brush motor for a wiring problem, and also the small BRN current sense wire in the harness and A2 pin J2-2.
  3. Check for a short circuit in the brush motor or wiring. Check for excessive belt tension and the condition of the idler bearing.
Left brush motor contactor coil overload (error code 05 displayed)
Contactor K4 is for the left motor on the three-motor decks.
  1. Check for a K4 coil wiring problem or a short circuit* (wire colors VIO and GRA/RED).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
Note that the nominal coil resistance is 94 ohms for all three motor contactors.
Center brush motor contactor coil overload (error code 06 displayed)
  1. Check for a K3 coil wiring problem or a short circuit (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
Right brush motor contactor coil overload (error code 07 displayed)
  1. Check for a K2 coil wiring problem or a short circuit* (wire colors VIO & YEL/BLU).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 75 ohms, replace the coil.
Scrub motor open (error code 21 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  2. Check for 36 volts at the scrub motor that is not running. If you get 0 Volts, replace the brush motor contactor.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 132, used with permission. SES ref PF-4A6N-CC7O‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‌‌​‌‍‍‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍‍‍‍​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 132 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting (continued)

ProblemError codeCauseCorrection
The scrub system will not operate (continued)22#Left brush motor contactor coil open (error code 22 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the K4 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and GRA/RED)
  2. Test for 36V at the K4 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
23#Left brush motor contactor coil short to ground (error code 23 displayed)
  1. Disconnect the K4 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and GRA/RED) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
24#Center brush motor contactor coil open (error code 24 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the K3 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO)
  2. Test for 36V at the K3 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
25#Center brush motor contactor coil short to ground (error code 25 displayed)
  1. Disconnect the K3 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and WHT/VIO) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
26#Right brush motor contactor coil open (error code 26 displayed)
  1. Check for an open circuit in the K2 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/BLU)
  2. Test for 36V at the K2 coil. If you get 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
27#Right brush motor contactor coil short to ground (error code 27 displayed)
  1. Disconnect the K2 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/BLU) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the brush contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 133, used with permission. SES ref PF-2DB3-QTRA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​⁠⁠​‍⁠‌​⁠‌⁠​⁠⁠​​⁠​⁠​⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 133 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting (continued)

ProblemError codeCauseCorrection
The scrub deck actuator doesn’t raise or lower the scrub deck08#Scrub deck actuator overload (error code 08 displayed)
  • Normal current load is 1-3 amps.
  • Max current load is 6 amps.
  • Max current with no load is 1.4 amps.
  1. Check for binding or a frozen brush lift linkage and excessive weight on the brush deck.
  2. Check for a short circuit in the actuator motor and wiring. Repair or replace.

To test the actuator, disconnect the motor plug and attach the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and perform an amp draw test. Compare readings to the current load specifications to the left.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‌​⁠⁠‌‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‍‌⁠⁠​​‍⁠​

28#Scrub deck actuator open (error code 28 displayed)
  1. Check for disconnected lift actuator wiring.
  2. Check for an open circuit in the motor wiring or for a defective motor.
  3. Check for output voltage from the A2 control board assembly at the actuator wiring plug. It should be 36 volts. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.

Removal and installation

Warning! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off and the key is removed from the machine.
In shortTaking the disc scrub deck out means lowering it onto wood blocking, then removing the brushes, hose, actuator pin, motor wiring, ID resistor plug and the four pivot support arm nuts before sliding the deck out the left side. The steps run from this page through page 135. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‌​⁠⁠‌‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‍‌⁠⁠​​‍⁠​

Scrub brush deck

Warning! Engage the parking brake and chock both rear wheels so the machine can’t roll.
  1. Loosen the four side skirt Retainer Knobs (two per side) and remove the Side Skirt Assemblies from the deck.
  2. Remove the scrub brushes from the brush holders.
  3. Place wood blocking (2x4) under both outside brush drive discs (brush holders) and lower the deck to the floor by pressing the Scrub On button.
Exploded view of the disc scrub deck with callouts: Scrub Deck Actuator, Cotter Hair Pin, Retainer Knob (4), Side Skirt Assembly, Solution Feed Hose, Retainer Pin, Pivot Support Arm (4), Hex Nut (4) and ID Resistor Plug
Scrub brush deck removal points
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 134, used with permission. SES ref PF-T4PK-QL7L‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‌​⁠⁠‌‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‍‌⁠⁠​​‍⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 134 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Service Note: Once the brush deck is in the lowered position, don’t turn the key switch off until you disconnect the battery pack (push in the Emergency Disconnect). This will prevent the scrub deck from automatically rising when the key is turned off.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌‍⁠‌​​‌​‌‍​‍​‍⁠​‍‍‍⁠⁠⁠

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Remove the Solution Feed Hose at solution distribution bladder located on the scrub deck.
  3. Remove bottom Scrub Deck Actuator Cotter Hair Pin, then push the Retainer Pin from its housing and mount bracket holes.
  4. Disconnect the Scrub Deck Actuator wire harness connector. Note that this will prevent the Scrub Deck Actuator from being switched on and rising when it is disconnected from its deck mount.
  5. Note the correct brush motor wire connections at each individual motor, then remove all the wiring from the motor terminals.
  6. Locate the ID (identification) Resistor Plug on the scrub brush deck and separate its connector.
  7. Remove the four Hex Nuts, hex screws and bushings from the left and right front deck supports, then swing the Pivot Support Arms away from their mounting holes.
  8. Remove the previously-installed wood blocking from underneath the drive discs. Note that this must be done to get the needed clearance to remove the scrub deck.
  9. Carefully slide the complete deck assembly out from underneath the machine from its left side.

Note: Observe the position of the disconnected lift actuator housing and swing it to the rear to clear its mount bracket pocket.

Scrub deck lift actuator

Note: All new replacement actuator motors are not shipped with the lift nut pre-adjusted for any specific machine model application.

Note: The scrub deck must be removed to access the top mount bracket on the scrub deck lift motor.

  1. Remove the scrub deck by following the steps in the Scrub Brush Deck section.
  2. Locate and remove the upper Cotter Hair Pin from underneath the middle of the machine.
  3. Slide the actuator Mount Pin from the housing and frame mounting bracket holes allowing the motor to drop down completing its removal.
  4. Refer to the Drive Nut Adjustment section for instructions on how to install a new drive nut and set the extended and retracted positions.
  5. Follow the above steps in reverse order to install the scrub deck actuator.
Two exploded views of the scrub deck lift actuator and its upper mount bracket with callouts Cotter Hair Pin and Mount Pin: left view is the actuator orientation for 40 in disk and cylindrical decks, right view is the actuator orientation for 45 in and 48 in disk and cylindrical decks
Scrub deck lift actuator mount pins
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 135, used with permission. SES ref PF-IGIX-SMTE‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌‍⁠‌​​‌​‌‍​‍​‍⁠​‍‍‍⁠⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 135 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Scrub brush motor and gearbox

In shortEach brush gearbox can be unbolted from the deck after removing the brush holder and drive hub, and the gearbox separates from its motor with three socket head cap screws. Save the key stock and put grease or anti-seize on the gearbox shafts when you reassemble. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‍​⁠​⁠​​‍⁠​​‌‍​​⁠​⁠​​

To remove and install a gearbox assembly

  1. Remove the scrub brushes from the Brush Holder(s).
  2. Use a 0.51 in (13 mm) socket wrench to remove the three Screws from each Thermoid Disk (flexible coupler), then remove the Brush Holder(s) from the Drive Hub(s).
  3. Remove the hex screw and hardened washer holding the Drive Hub onto the Gearbox Assembly, then pull the Drive Hub off of the Gearbox Output Shaft. Make sure you save the key stock.
  4. Remove the three Hex Screws that secure each Gearbox Assembly to the deck mounting plate.
  5. Separate the Gearbox Assembly from the Deck Weldment by pulling it straight up.
  6. Reassemble the Gearbox Assembly to the Deck Weldment by following the above steps in reverse order. Make sure to reinstall the key stock.
Exploded view of a 40 in deck (shown) with callouts: Gearbox Assembly, Gearbox (typical), Gearbox Output Shaft, Brush Motor (typical), Deck Weldment, Hex Screw (3), Drive Hub, Thermoid Disk (2), Screw (3), Brush Holder and a Rotation arrow
Gearbox assembly removal, 40 in deck shown

To disassemble and reassemble a gearbox assembly

  1. Remove the three socket head cap screws securing the Gearbox to the Brush Motor, then separate the Gearbox from the Brush Motor. Make sure to save the internal Gearbox key stock for reassembly.
  2. Reassemble the Gearbox and Brush Motor by following the above steps in reverse order.

Service Note: Apply a small amount of grease or Never-Seez® anti-seize compound to the Gearbox input and output shafts when you reassemble or install a Gearbox Assembly. This will aid future disassembly and Drive Hub removal.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‍​⁠​⁠​​‍⁠​​‌‍​​⁠​⁠​​

Top view of a 45 in / 48 in disk deck with a FRONT arrow and three curved arrows labeled Brush Rotation showing the rotation direction of each of the three brushes
Brush rotation, 45 in / 48 in disk decks
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 136, used with permission. SES ref PF-KFDU-QN7M‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‍​⁠​⁠​​‍⁠​​‌‍​​⁠​⁠​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 136 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

ComponentSpecifications
Scrub Brush Motors40” deckType – Permanent Magnet
Voltage – 36 VDC
Power – 3 HP
Speed – 2400 RPM
Current – 75 Amps
45” and 48” decksVoltage – 36 VDC
Power – 1.5 HP
Speed – 4000 RPM
Current – 45 Amps
Deck Actuator MotorType – permanent magnet, 36 VDC, 1/5 HP, reversible
Motor-to-drive-screw ratio – 19.1:1
Performance Data
No Load – Thrust 0 lbs., Speed 36 ±4 in/min, 1.0 ±0.5 Amps
Full Load – Thrust 600 lbs., Speed 29 ±3 in/min, 5.0 ±1 Amps
Stall Current – 25 Amps max.
Start Thrust – 600 lbs. min.

Shop measurements

Brush Contactor (K2, K3 or K4) resistance at room temperature: 93 ohms‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠‍‌‍‌​⁠‌‌​‍‍⁠‌​‍‍‌​​⁠‌

Scrub brush motor

  • 40D and 1100D deck with no load (brushes out): 11.7-12.2 Amps
  • 45D and 1300D deck with no load (brushes out): Not measured
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 137, used with permission. SES ref PF-55HZ-QRLU‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠‍‌‍‌​⁠‌‌​‍‍⁠‌​‍‍‌​​⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 137 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Special tools

Actuator Power Cord Adapter, p/n 56407502
Actuator power cord adapter: a cable with a plug-in connector at one end and two alligator-style clips at the other end
Actuator power cord adapter
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 138, used with permission. SES ref PF-SNSL-7CJY‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​‌‌‍​‍‌⁠⁠‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‌​​​⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 138 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Solution system

Functional description

Overview

In shortThe solution system sends water and detergent to the brushes. Standard (non-EcoFlex) SC6500 models gravity-feed the solution through a solenoid, while EcoFlex models use a solution pump and a separate detergent tank with detergent pumps. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​​​​⁠‌​‍​​​​‍​‍​‌⁠‍​⁠⁠

The solution system provides the Water and detergent mixture to the scrub brushes. Water and detergent are added to the solution tank for Standard (non-EcoFlex) SC6500 models. EcoFlex models have a separate detergent tank. On both standard and EcoFlex models the Drain Hose allows you to drain the Solution Tank by removing the Drain Plug.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​​​​⁠‌​‍​​​​‍​‍​‌⁠‍​⁠⁠

On standard (non-EcoFlex) models, the solution is gravity fed through the plumbing to the scrub deck. The solution solenoid is spring loaded closed to block the fluid. The A2 Control Board provides pulsed-width-modulated (PWM) voltage to the Solution Solenoid to regulate the solution flow rate.

On EcoFlex models, a solution pump is used to move fluid from the solution tank to the scrub deck. The A2 Control Board provides pulsed-width-modulated (PWM) voltage to the Solution Control Pump to regulate the solution flow rate. Note that the Solution Solenoid Valve is full-open whenever the solution system is switched on.

On EcoFlex models, when the detergent system is switched on, the solenoid style Detergent Pumps inject detergent into the solution sytem plumbing. The A2 Control Board provides PWM voltage to the Detergent Pumps to regulate the detergent flow.

EcoFlex solution system plumbing diagram with labeled parts: Solution Tank, Drain Hose, Drain Plug, Shutoff Valve, Solution Solenoid Valve, Detergent Tank, Detergent Pumps, Solution Pump, In-line Solution Filter, Solution Manifold, Disc Scrub Brushes and Cylindrical Scrub Brushes
EcoFlex Solution System Plumbing
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 139, used with permission. SES ref PF-FFGG-E3XC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​​​​⁠‌​‍​​​​‍​‍​‌⁠‍​⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 139 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Solution tank

The Solution Tank holds 70 gallons (265 L) of solution. The solution fill cover opens to allow you to fill the Solution Tank. The solution empty switch is a float switch that closes and sends a signal to the A2 Control Board Assembly when the solution level in the Solution Tank falls to two to three inches from the bottom of the tank. The solution system indicator will flash to remind the operator of the low-solution condition, but the machine will continue to function.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠​‍‍​‌‌​‍‍⁠‍⁠​​‍‌​⁠‌‍‌

Shutoff valve

The Shutoff Valve allows you to shut off the solution flow from the Solution Tank for cleaning and maintenance.

Drain hose and hose cap

The Drain Hose allows you to drain the solution tank. To drain the tank, remove the Drain Hose Cap.

Solution filter

The in-line Solution Filter prevents any sediment or debris from reaching the solution control pump and solution solenoid valve. The Solution Filter can be disassembled for cleaning.

Solution control pump

The Solution Control Pump pumps the solution through the solution solenoid valve to the nozzles adjacent to the scrub brushes. The Solution Control Pump gets PWM voltage from the A2 Control Board to regulate the Solution Control Pump speed and the corresponding solution flow.

Solution solenoid valve

The Solution Solenoid Valve opens to allow solution flow to the scrub brushes. Although the Solution Solenoid Valve gets PWM voltage from the A2 Control Board, it remains full-open when the solution pump is switched on.

Solution manifold (disc decks only)

The Solution Manifold distributes the solution from the solution pump to the nozzles adjacent to the scrub brushes.

Accessory pump

The accessory pump is included in the optional Spray Wand Kit and pumps solution to the spray wand. The pump has its own pressure switch that switches the pump on or off automatically when the wand trigger is pressed or released.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 140, used with permission. SES ref PF-GT33-53CF‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠​‍‍​‌‌​‍‍⁠‍⁠​​‍‌​⁠‌‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 140 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Detergent tank and pumps

The Detergent Pumps pump detergent from the Detergent Tank to the tee fitting upstream of the solution pump. The Detergent Pumps get PWM voltage from the A2 Control Board to regulate the speed of the Detergent Pumps and the subsequent detergent flow.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌‌​‌‍‍‍​‍​‍​⁠‌‍‌⁠​​‌​‌

Solution system wiring diagram

Solution system wiring diagram showing the 36V battery, F4 250 A fuse, A1 speed controller, K7 and K5 contactors, F1 and F2 circuit breakers, S1 key switch, D1 diode, S2 seat switch, S3 battery interlock switch, the A2 control board assembly, A3 switch/display panel assembly, solution control pump M12, solenoid valve L1, detergent metering pumps M13 and M16, accessory pump M15 and the S5 solution empty switch
Solution system wiring diagram
Label on drawingPrinted text
F4Fuse, 250 A
(battery)36V Battery
A1Speed Controller (terminal numbers 16, 15, 8, 4, 3; terminals B-, B+)
K7(label only)
F1Circuit Breaker, 3 Amp
S1Key Switch
D1Diode
S2Seat Switch
S3Battery Interlock Switch (for roll-out Battery)
K5(label only)
F2Circuit Breaker, 15 Amp
A2Control Board Assembly (terminals printed: Motion, Direction, Bat -, Bat +, CAN H, CAN L)
A3Switch/Display Panel Assembly
M12Solution Control Pump
L1Solenoid Valve (terminals 1 and 2)
M13Detergent Metering Pump
M16Detergent Metering Pump
M15Accessory Pump (optional)
S5Solution Empty Switch (closes when empty)
(arrows)B+ (printed once, under the inner lower-left arrow; the corner arrows at lower left and lower right carry no label)
(line)Battery Ground (printed on the line to the right of the A2 box)

Circuit description

Solution system

The Solution Control Pump M12 and solution Solenoid Valve L1 get positive voltage from the Battery when the load side of contactor K5 is closed. The contactor K5 closes when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K5 coil to battery ground.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 141, used with permission. SES ref PF-BXGF-LA3G‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌‌​‌‍‍‍​‍​‍​⁠‌‍‌⁠​​‌​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 141 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

The Solution Control Pump M12 and solution Solenoid Valve L1 are connected to battery ground through the A2 Control Board Assembly. The A2 Control Board Assembly connects the Solution Control Pump M12 and solution Solenoid Valve L1 to ground to run the Solution Control Pump M12 and switch on the Solenoid Valve L1 when:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‌‍‌‍‍​⁠​‍‌​⁠​⁠⁠‍​‌​‍​⁠

  • The A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly sends the A2 Control Board Assembly a signal via the CAN BUS that the solution system has been enabled, and,
  • The A1 Speed Controller sends the A2 Control Board Assembly a signal that the wheel drive is switched on. Note that you can select whether the solution system will switch on when the machine is moving in both forward and reverse, or when moving forward only. This option is described in the Control System/Main Control Programming Options section.

Note that the ground voltage from the A2 Control Board Assembly to the Solution Control Pump M12 is pulse-width-modulated (PWM) voltage that varies in frequency to control the solution flow from the Solution Control Pump M12. The ground voltage from the A2 Control Board Assembly to the Solenoid Valve L1 is also PWM voltage, but is always at full voltage when the Solution Control Pump M12 is on.

Detergent system

The Detergent Metering Pumps M13 and M16 are powered directly by the A2 Control Board Assembly. The A2 Control Board Assembly sends the Detergent Metering Pumps voltage to run the Detergent Metering Pumps when:

  • The A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly sends the A2 Control Board Assembly a signal via the CAN BUS that the detergent system has been enabled, and,
  • The solution system is switched on.

Note that the voltage from the A2 Control Board Assembly to the Detergent Metering Pumps is PWM voltage that varies in frequency to control the detergent flow from the Detergent Metering Pumps into the solution system.

Accessory pump

The Accessory Pump M15 gets positive voltage from the Battery when the load side of contactor K5 is closed. When the internal Accessory Pump pressure switch is closed, it connects the negative side of the Pump motor to battery ground. The pressure switch works as follows:

  • When the wand trigger is pressed and the pressure in the wand solution hose drops to a predetermined level, the pressure switch switches on the Accessory Pump.
  • When the wand trigger is released, the Accessory Pump will continue to run momentarily. When the pressure in the wand solution hose increases to a predetermined level, the pressure switch switches off the Accessory Pump.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 142, used with permission. SES ref PF-UCKE-JBB4‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‌‍‌‍‍​⁠​‍‌​⁠​⁠⁠‍​‌​‍​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 142 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Component locations

Shutoff valve

The Shutoff Valve is located underneath the solution tank on the left rear side of the machine.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‍‍‌‌‍​‌​‍‍​​⁠​‌​⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌

Photo looking at the left rear wheel well with a callout and arrow pointing to the Shutoff Valve underneath the solution tank
Shutoff valve location

Solution level switch

The solution level switch is a float switch in the bottom of the solution tank. It reports when the tank is nearly empty. The solution system indicator will flash to remind the operator of the low-solution condition, but the machine will continue to function.

Photo looking down through the solution tank fill opening with a callout and arrow pointing to the S5 Solution Empty Switch
Viewed from solution tank fill opening
Photo from under the solution tank with a callout and arrow pointing to the S5 Solution Empty Switch and its wiring connector
Viewed from under solution tank
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 143, used with permission. SES ref PF-FEIX-WDO7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‍‍‌‌‍​‌​‍‍​​⁠​‌​⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 143 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Drain hose and hose cap

The Drain Hose and Drain Hose Cap are attached to the shutoff valve and are located above the left rear tire.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌⁠​​​​‍‌‌‍​‍‌⁠‌‍​⁠‌‍​​

Photo of the left rear tire area with callouts for the Drain Hose and the Drain Hose Cap
Drain hose and drain hose cap location

Solution filter

The in-line Solution Filter is located between the shutoff valve and the solution pump underneath the left side of the machine. The Solution Filter is below the FILTER location arrow molded into the machine body panel.

The FILTER location arrow symbol: a downward arrow with the word FILTER and a water-level line, molded into the machine body panel
FILTER location arrow
Photo underneath the left side of the machine with a callout and arrow pointing to the Solution Filter
Solution filter location

Solution control pump

The Solution Control Pump pumps the solution through the solution solenoid valve to the nozzles adjacent to the scrub brushes. The Solution Control Pump gets PWM voltage from the A2 Control Board to regulate the Solution Control Pump speed and the subsequent solution flow.

Photo of the solution control pump mounted under the machine with a callout and arrow labeled Solution Control Pump
Solution control pump location
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 144, used with permission. SES ref PF-N3H2-QLEI‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌⁠​​​​‍‌‌‍​‍‌⁠‌‍​⁠‌‍​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 144 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Solution solenoid valve

The Solution Solenoid Valve opens to allow solution flow to the scrub brushes. Although the Solution Solenoid Valve gets PWM voltage from the A2 Control Board, it remains full-open when the solution pump is switched on.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌⁠‍​⁠⁠‍​​‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‍​‍‍​‍⁠

Photo of the solution solenoid valve mounted on the machine with a callout and arrow labeled Solution Solenoid Valve
Solution solenoid valve location

Solution manifold (disc decks only)

The Solution Manifold distributes the solution from the solution pump and solenoid valve to the nozzles adjacent to the scrub brushes.

Photo of the solution manifold, a clear plastic tee fitting joining hoses, with a callout and arrow labeled Solution Manifold
Solution manifold location

Accessory pump

The Accessory Pump is included in the optional Spray Wand Kit. The pump mounts on the underside of the chassis,

Drawing of the underside of the chassis with a small inset of the whole machine, and a callout and arrow pointing to the Accessory Pump mounted on the chassis
Accessory pump location
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 145, used with permission. SES ref PF-ONN4-765H‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌⁠‍​⁠⁠‍​​‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‍​‍‍​‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 145 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Detergent tank and pumps

The Detergent Tank and Detergent Pumps are located behind the side access panel on the right-hand side of the machine.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍⁠‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠​‌​​⁠‌​​

Photo behind the right-hand side access panel showing two Detergent Pumps with clear tubing and the Detergent Tank, each with a callout
Detergent tank and pumps location
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 146, used with permission. SES ref PF-OYUP-234B‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍⁠‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠​‌​​⁠‌​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 146 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
In shortWeekly solution system care is rinsing the solution tank through the drain hose and cleaning the solution filter, and the solenoid valve can be taken apart and washed. Always close the shutoff valve before servicing the filter on a tank with solution in it. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‌‍‍​​⁠​⁠​‍⁠​⁠‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠

To disassemble and clean the solution solenoid valve

  1. Remove the solution solenoid valve from the machine. (Refer to the Removal and Installation/Solution Solenoid Valve section.)
  2. Remove the four Screws and disassemble the solenoid valve. Be careful not to lose any internal parts.
  3. Thoroughly wash any dirt or sediment from the Block and Diaphragm.
  4. After you reassemble the solenoid valve, check the valve for correct operation.
Exploded view of the solution solenoid valve with callouts Block, Diaphragm and Screw (4)
Solution solenoid valve disassembly

Weekly maintenance

To empty and rinse the solution tank

  1. Remove the solution drain hose from its storage area (located above the left rear tire).
  2. Remove the drain hose cap and direct the hose to a designated disposal site and flush the tank with clean water.
  3. Replace the drain hose cap and replace the drain hose in its storage area.

To clean the solution filter

  1. Close the solution shutoff valve to prevent solution from draining from the solution tank when servicing the filter with a partial or full solution tank.

Note: Place a suitable container underneath the filter to catch any solution that may leak from the hoses.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‌‍‍​​⁠​⁠​‍⁠​⁠‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠

The adjacent photo shows the Solution Filter removed from the machine to more clearly show the individual components.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 147, used with permission. SES ref PF-UOHZ-IVHE‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‌‍‍​​⁠​⁠​‍⁠​⁠‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 147 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Unscrew the Filter Cover and remove the Filter Cover and Screen from the Filter Base.
  2. Clean any accumulated dirt or debris from the Screen.
  3. Reinstall the Screen into the Filter Base.
  4. Make sure the Rubber Washer is installed correctly in the Filter Cover, then reinstall and hand-tighten the Filter Cover.
Photo of the solution filter taken apart with callouts for the Filter Cover, Rubber Washer, Screen and Filter Base
Solution filter parts
Parts for this job

To clean the solution delivery trough (cylindrical scrub decks only)

Clean the holes in the Delivery Trough to ensure even solution distribution.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​​⁠​‌‌‌‍​‌‌‌⁠‌‍⁠‌‍⁠‍​⁠

Photo of the solution delivery trough on a cylindrical deck with a callout and arrow labeled Delivery Trough, showing the small holes along the trough
Delivery trough

To purge the detergent system

  1. Disconnect and remove the detergent tank.
  2. Install and connect a tank filled with clean water.
  3. Turn the key switch off.
  4. Press and hold both the detergent and solution switches.
  5. While holding the switches, turn the key switch on. The display will show the purge icon, the detergent and solution pumps will run for 20 seconds, then the pumps will shut off.
  6. When the purge cycle is complete, turn the key switch off. Normally one purge cycle is adequate to purge the system.
The purge icon shown on the display: a flask with a downward arrow
Purge icon
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 148, used with permission. SES ref PF-AW5E-KBVH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​​⁠​‌‌‌‍​‌‌‌⁠‌‍⁠‌‍⁠‍​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 148 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

To purge the detergent system when changing detergents

  1. Disconnect and remove the detergent tank.
  2. Turn the key switch off.
  3. Press and hold both the detergent and solution switches.
  4. While holding the switches, turn the key switch on. The display will show the purge icon, the detergent and solution pumps will run for 20 seconds, then shut off.
  5. When the purge cycle is complete, turn the key switch off.
  6. Install and connect the new detergent tank.
The purge icon shown on the display: a flask with a downward arrow
Purge icon

To program the detergent ratio

There are 10 available detergent ratios. Select the desired detergent ratio as follows:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠​​​‍‍‍‍‍​‌​​‍

  1. Press the detergent switch to turn the detergent system off (if not already off).
  2. Press and hold the detergent switch for two seconds to enter the ratio programming mode. The detergent system indicator will blink while in the programming mode.
  3. Press the detergent switch to cycle through the available detergent ratios as follows:
    • Advance Brand Display: 1:400, 1:300, 1:256, 1:200 (shown here), 1:150, 1:128, 1:100, 1:64, 1:50, and 1:32.
    • Nilfisk Brand Display: 0.25%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.66%, 0.8%, 1%, 1.5%, 2%, and 3%.
  4. When the desired ratio is displayed, stop pressing the detergent switch. After five seconds the machine will lock in the displayed detergent ratio setting.
The control panel display in detergent ratio programming mode, showing 1:200 with the detergent flask icon, an hourglass icon and a 0.4 reading at the left, squeegee and brush icons, a battery gauge and two other bar gauges
Display showing a 1:200 detergent ratio
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 149, used with permission. SES ref PF-5WIH-56ID‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠​​​‍‍‍‍‍​‌​​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 149 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

In shortIf solution is not flowing, start with the shutoff valve and the filter, then check the L1 solenoid and M12 pump circuits using the error codes in this table. The solenoid coil should read about 74 ohms, and the pump should draw 0.8 to 1.8 amps. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌‌​‍⁠‌⁠‍‌‍​​‍‍​‌‌​‍⁠‍​

Note: You can use the Service Test Mode to toggle the various system components on and off to check for function. Refer to the Control System/Service Mode section for information on how to enter and use the Service Test Mode.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌‌​‍⁠‌⁠‍‌‍​​‍‍​‌‌​‍⁠‍​

ProblemError codeCauseCorrection
ProblemCauseSolution
Inadequate or no solution flowThe solution shutoff valve is in the off position.Open the solution shutoff valve.
Clogged solution filter, solenoid valve, hoses.
Clogged solution delivery trough (cylindrical decks only)
  • Check the solution filter for obstructions and clean as necessary.
  • Check the solenoid valve for obstructions and clear as necessary.
  • Check the solution hoses for obstructions and clear as necessary.
  • Check the solution manifold and solution delivery trough and clear/clean as necessary (disc decks only).
Parts ›
33#L1 Solution solenoid open (Main Controller Error Code 33)
  • Check for open circuit in the L1 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and YEL/GRN).
  • Check for 36V at the L1 coil.
34#L1 Solution solenoid short to ground (Main Controller Error Code 34)
  • Disconnect the L1 solenoid coil wiring and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the solution solenoid.
    • If the code reappears, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  • Substitute a new A1 control board.
12#Solution solenoid L1 overload (Main Controller Error Code 12)
  • Check for a short in the solenoid wiring and repair as necessary.
  • Check the solenoid coil resistance. The nominal coil resistance is 74 ohms. If the coil resistance is lower than 58 ohms, replace the solution solenoid.
35#Solution pump open (Main Controller Error Code 35)
  • Check for an open circuit in the M12 pump motor and wiring (wire colors VIO and BLU/ORN).
  • Check for 36V at the pump motor.
13#Solution pump overload (Main Controller Error Code 13)
  • Check for a short in the solution pump wiring and solution pump M12 and repair as necessary.
  • Disconnect the pump motor and run the machine to see if the wiring is shorted.
  • Check the pump motor current draw. The normal current load is 0.8 to 1.8 amps. A current load of 3.2 amps or over will cause a pump motor overload error code 13. If the pump motor draws excessive current, replace the pump motor.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 150, used with permission. SES ref PF-UPD5-WJJA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌‌​‍⁠‌⁠‍‌‍​​‍‍​‌‌​‍⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 150 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting (continued)

ProblemCauseCorrection
Inadequate or no detergent flowThe detergent system has not been selected in the main control programming.Check that the detergent system has been selected in the main control programming.
Blockage in or damage to the detergent linesCheck detergent lines for blockage or damage and repair/replace as necessary.
The detergent tank cap is not sealed on the tank.Tighten the tank cap. The detergent tank cap must be seated securely and tight to pull (draw detergent) from the tank.
The detergent pumps are not operating.
  • Check the wire connections at the detergent pumps for correct wiring polarity.
  • Make sure the electrical connections are tight and corrosion-free.
  • With the system activated, touch the pumps to feel them pulsate when operating. If a pump is getting voltage but is not operating, replace the pump.
Parts ›
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 151, used with permission. SES ref PF-3N4P-4FEK‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌⁠‌‌‍‌​‍‌‍‍‍‌​​⁠‌⁠‌⁠‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 151 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

Warning! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.
In shortThe solution control pump is reached from underneath the machine: shut off or drain the solution, disconnect the battery and the pump connector, then remove four screws and two hoses. Install it by reversing the steps. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌​‌⁠‌​‍⁠‌‍‌⁠‌‌​‌‌⁠⁠​‌⁠

Solution control pump

Note: Access the solution control pump from underneath the machine.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌​‌⁠‌​‍⁠‌‍‌⁠‌‌​‌‌⁠⁠​‌⁠

  1. Drain the solution tank or turn the solution shutoff valve to the off position to prevent solution loss.
  2. Disconnect the battery from the machine.

Note: Place a suitable container underneath the solution control pump to catch any solution that may leak from the pump or hoses.

  1. Disconnect the pump Electrical Connector from the machine harness.
  2. Remove the four #10-24 Screws, Nyloc™ nuts and flat washers holding the Solution Control Pump to the bottom of the machine.
  3. Loosen the Clamps holding the Hoses to the Elbows and disconnect (pry) the Hoses off of the Elbows.
  4. Remove the Solution Control Pump from the machine.
  5. Reinstall the Solution Control Pump by following the above steps in reverse order.
Exploded view of the solution control pump with callouts Hose (2), Clamp (2), Elbow (2), #10-24 Screw (4), Electrical Connector and Solution Control Pump
Solution control pump removal
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 152, used with permission. SES ref PF-BDLD-PAHK‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌​‌⁠‌​‍⁠‌‍‌⁠‌‌​‌‌⁠⁠​‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 152 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Solution solenoid valve

  1. Drain the solution tank or turn the solution shutoff valve to the off position to prevent solution loss.
  2. Disconnect the battery from the machine.

Note: Place a suitable container underneath the filter to catch any solution that may leak from the solenoid valve or hoses.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌​‌‌​​​​⁠‍​⁠‍‍‍⁠‍⁠‍​​​

  1. Disconnect the L1 solenoid valve Electrical Connector from the machine harness.
  2. Loosen the Hose Clamps on the Inlet and Outlet Hoses.
  3. Separate (pry) the Outlet Hose off of the barbed fitting on the Valve Body.
  4. Remove the two Hex Screws holding the Valve Body to the underside of the chassis, then pull the Valve Body toward the front of the machine to separate it from the Outlet Hose.
  5. Reinstall the solenoid valve by following the above steps in reverse order.
Exploded view of the solution solenoid valve with callouts Electrical Connector, Inlet Hose, Hex Screw (2), Valve Body, Hose Clamp (2) and Outlet Hose, and a small machine drawing with an arrow showing the front of the machine
Solution solenoid valve removal
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 153, used with permission. SES ref PF-OBOL-7PXM‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌​‌‌​​​​⁠‍​⁠‍‍‍⁠‍⁠‍​​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 153 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

Solution flow rates

In shortThe table gives solution flow in GPM at 1 to 5 bars for each deck type, with 1 to 3 bars listed as standard flow rates and 4 and 5 bars as override flow rates. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍⁠​⁠‌‌‍​‍‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍⁠​‌​‍
Standard Flow RatesOverride Flow Rates
1 bar2 bars3 bars4 bars5 bars
40” Disc.84 GPM1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.00 GPM2.50 GPM
40” Cylindrical.70 GPM.84 GPM1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.50 GPM
45”/48” Disc1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.00 GPM2.25 GPM2.50 GPM
45”/48” Cylindrical.84 GPM1.00 GPM1.50 GPM2.00 GPM2.50 GPM

Component specifications

ComponentSpecifications
Solution Control PumpVoltage - 36 VDC
Current Draw - 3.9 amps max.
Flow Rate - 3.3 GPM @ 2.75 amps with 20 psi inlet pressure
Solution Solenoid ValveCoil Voltage - 36 VDC
Coil Resistance - 74 ohms
Accessory PumpVoltage - 36 VDC
Current Draw - 3.0 amps max.
Pressure Control Setting - 100 ±5 psi
Maximum Flow Rate - 1.6 gal/min
Detergent PumpVoltage - 24 VDC
Flow Rate - 2.9 ±0.1 fl oz/min (87 ±3 ml/min)

Shop measurements

Solultion Solenoid (L1) resistance at room temperature: 93 ohms‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍⁠​⁠‌‌‍​‍‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍⁠​‌​‍

Chemical Metering Pump (M13, M16): 36.6 ohms

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 154, used with permission. SES ref PF-OSFP-DRAX‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍⁠​⁠‌‌‍​‍‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍⁠​‌​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 154 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Squeegee system

In shortThe squeegee tool picks up the dirty water and the recovery system vacuum sends it to the recovery tank. The A2 control board assembly raises and lowers the squeegee tool with the squeegee actuator M3. Need a part or help with this system? Call us at 800-440-6723.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​​‍​‌‍⁠‌‍‌‍​‍​⁠‌​‌⁠‌⁠​

Functional description

Overview

The squeegee system includes the squeegee tool and the squeegee lift actuator.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​​‍​‌‍⁠‌‍‌‍​‍​⁠‌​‌⁠‌⁠​

The squeegee tool picks up the wastewater from the floor. The recovery system vacuum lifts the wastewater from the squeegee and directs it to the recovery tank.

The squeegee lift actuator, controlled by the A2 control board assembly, raises and lowers the squeegee tool.

Squeegee system wiring diagram

Wiring diagram of the squeegee system: 36 volt battery, 250 amp fuse F4, key switch S1, diode D1, seat switch S2, battery interlock switch S3, relay K7, A1 speed controller, A2 control board assembly, A3 switch/display panel assembly and squeegee actuator M3
Squeegee system wiring diagram
ReferenceLabel printed on the drawing
F4Fuse, 250 A
Battery36V Battery
A1Speed Controller (terminals marked 16, 15, 8, 4, 3, B-, B+)
K7K7 (no other label printed)
F1Circuit Breaker, 3 Amp
S1Key Switch
D1Diode
S2Seat Switch
S3Battery Interlock Switch (for roll-out Battery)
A2Control Board Assembly (terminals marked Motion, Direction, CAN H, CAN L; line marked Battery Ground)
A3Switch/Display Panel Assembly
M3Squeegee Actuator
TerminalsB+ and B-

Circuit description

The Squeegee Actuator M3 gets voltage from the A2 Control Board Assembly which switches the polarity to move the squeegee tool up or down. When the A2 Control Board Assembly receives a signal from the A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly via the CAN BUS that the operator has pressed the scrub on switch, the A2 Control Board Assembly sends the appropriate voltage to the Squeegee Actuator M3 to lower the squeegee to the operating position.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 155, used with permission. SES ref PF-X4TL-C2X5‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​​‍​‌‍⁠‌‍‌‍​‍​⁠‌​‌⁠‌⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 155 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Squeegee lift actuator reverse function

The squeegee actuator operates in the automatic mode when scrubbing and will automatically lower to its normal operating position when the scrub system is enabled. To prevent squeegee blade damage and excessive wear, the Squeegee Actuator M3 will lift the squeegee tool from the floor when the machine is operated in reverse.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‌‍‌⁠‌‌​⁠​⁠⁠‍‍‍​⁠​​​​⁠

To get the squeegee tool to lift in reverse, the drive pedal must be moved off its neutral or forward position, which triggers the needed reverse direction output from the A1 Speed Controller to the A2 Control Board Assembly. The A2 Control Board Assembly sends voltage to the Squeegee Actuator M3 at the appropriate polarity, and for a specified time, to lift the squeegee to a position that is half the upward distance that the squeegee moves when the scrub system is switched off.

Moving the drive pedal back to the neutral/forward switches off the reverse direction output from the A1 Speed Controller to the A2 Control Board Assembly. The A2 Control Board Assembly then sends voltage to the Squeegee Actuator M3 at the appropriate polarity to lower the squeegee tool back onto the floor.

Component locations

The Squeegee Assembly is attached to the Squeegee Mount Weldment, which is attached to the Squeegee Lift Arm Weldment. The Squeegee Assembly is fastened to the Squeegee Mount Weldment with two Thumb Nuts.

The Squeegee Lift Actuator raises and lowers the Squeegee Assembly, and is mounted horizontally in the left rear of the chassis underneath the recovery tank. The Squeegee Lift Actuator is attached to the machine frame and to the Squeegee Lift Arm Weldment.

The Ball Joint attaches the Squeegee Lift Arm Weldment to the frame and allows the Squeegee Assembly to move as necessary.

Exploded view of the squeegee lift components, labeled: Ball Joint, Squeegee Arm Weldment, Squeegee Mount Weldment, Squeegee Lift Arm Weldment, Squeegee Lift Actuator, two Thumb Nuts and the Squeegee Assembly
Squeegee lift components
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 156, used with permission. SES ref PF-EI3G-ZPMC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‌‍‌⁠‌‌​⁠​⁠⁠‍‍‍​⁠​​​​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 156 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

WARNING! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

To reverse or replace the rear squeegee wiping blade

  1. Raise the squeegee tool off the floor, then unsnap the Center Latch on the squeegee tool.
  2. Swing out the Tension Straps at both ends, disengage the Tension Strap slots from the Front Strap and remove the Tension Straps.
  3. Slip the Rear Blade off the alignment pins.
  4. The Rear Blade has four working edges. Turn the Rear Blade so a clean, undamaged edge points toward the front of the machine. Replace the blade if all four edges are nicked, torn or worn to a large radius.
  5. Install the Rear Blade, following the above steps in reverse order, then adjust the squeegee as necessary.
Exploded view of the squeegee tool showing the Squeegee Mount Weldment, Wing Nut (typical), Front Strap, two Thumb Nuts, Front Blade, Rear Blade, two Tension Straps and the Center Latch
Squeegee blades and straps

To reverse or replace the front squeegee blade

  1. Raise the squeegee tool off the floor, then loosen the two Thumb Nuts on top of the squeegee and remove the squeegee tool from the Squeegee Mount Weldment.
  2. Remove both Tension Straps, then remove the Wing Nuts holding the Front Blade in place as shown, then remove the Front Strap and Front Blade.
  3. The Front Blade has four working edges. Turn the Front Blade so a clean, undamaged edge points toward the front of the machine. Replace the Front Blade if all four edges are nicked, torn or worn to a large radius.
  4. Install the Front Blade, following the above steps in reverse order, then adjust the squeegee as necessary.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 157, used with permission. SES ref PF-LR63-PNDJ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌‌‍​‍​‌​‍‌‍‍‌​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 157 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Squeegee adjustment

There are two major squeegee tool adjustments–height and angle. The recommended procedure is to set the squeegee angle first, then adjust the squeegee blade height.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‌​⁠‌‌⁠‍‌‌⁠⁠‍‌‌‍​⁠‍⁠​‌

To adjust the squeegee angle

Adjust the squeegee angle whenever a blade is reversed or replaced, or if the squeegee is not wiping the floor dry.

  1. Park the machine on a flat, even surface and lower the squeegee.
  2. Drive the machine forward enough to have the squeegee blades fold over to the rear as shown in the detail drawing.
  3. Turn the Tilt Adjustment Knob to tilt the tool forward or backward until the rear squeegee wiping blade touches the floor evenly across its entire width.
Squeegee tool and mount with the Tilt Adjustment Knob and the two Caster Adjustment Knobs labeled
Squeegee tilt and caster adjustment knobs

To adjust the squeegee blade height

Adjust the squeegee height whenever a blade is reversed or replaced, or if the squeegee is not wiping the floor dry. The squeegee blade height is easily adjustable at the caster wheels. To adjust the squeegee blade height:

  1. Park the machine on a flat, even surface and lower the squeegee.
  2. Drive the machine forward enough to have the squeegee blades fold over to the rear as shown in the detail drawing.
  3. Rotate the Caster Adjustment Knobs clockwise to lift the squeegee, or counterclockwise to lower it. A starting point when replacing the blades is to adjust the caster-mounting bracket so it is level (parallel) to the top of the squeegee tool.

Note: The right and left caster wheels must be adjusted equally to maintain level and even blade pressure.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 158, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZOSR-ZS4Q‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‌​⁠‌‌⁠‍‌‌⁠⁠‍‌‌‍​⁠‍⁠​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 158 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Lift actuator adjustment

Using the actuator power cord adapter

The adjacent drawing shows the special actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) that is needed to connect the machine’s battery pack and actuator motor for setting the actuator drive nut limit settings. To connect the actuator power cord adapter:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌​‌​​​​​‌​⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​‍⁠‍​

Actuator power cord adapter: a cord with a rocker switch housing at one end, a motor plug and two alligator clips
Actuator power cord adapter, p/n 56407502
  1. Open the machine battery compartment and disconnect the battery connector. The battery pack is needed to power the lift actuator motor to correctly set the IN and OUT limit switches.
  2. Connect the actuator motor to be tested to the power cord adapter end.
  3. Connect the alligator clips from the cord adapter (red clip to the positive and black to negative) to battery connector or battery posts. Use the rocker switch on the actuator power cord adapter to change the motor rotation when setting the correct actuator drive nut dimensions.

Service Note: You can use the above actuator power cord adapter to help position the drive nut/spring housing assembly (in or out) for ease in actuator motor installations.

Actuator drive nut adjustment

  1. Hold onto the Actuator Drive Nut and press the rocker switch on the actuator power cord adapter to run the drive motor and retract the Actuator Drive Nut toward the motor housing (the IN limit).
  2. Measure the position of the Actuator Drive Nut on the actuator shaft. Manually turn the Actuator Drive Nut (steel tube) to the IN position as shown in the table on the following page for the specific actuator motor needing adjustment.
Side view of a lift actuator showing the Adjuster Cover, the Actuator Drive Nut, and the IN and OUT position dimensions measured from the motor housing
Actuator drive nut IN and OUT positions

Note: All adjustment settings are measured out of the machine (not attached).

  1. Hold the Actuator Drive Nut then press the adapter cord rocker switch to run the drive motor to the OUT position (wait until the motor stops).
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 159, used with permission. SES ref PF-D54C-JDJZ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌​‌​​​​​‌​⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​‍⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 159 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Measure the position of the Actuator Drive Nut on the shaft and compare the measurement with the OUT position shown in the table below.
Part #Actuator MotorActuator Drive Nut IN PositionActuator Drive Nut OUT PositionModels
56413111Squeegee Lift1-1/4 in (3.17 cm)3-1/8 in (7.93 cm)All
  1. If the OUT measurement doesn’t match the dimension shown in the table, remove the Adjuster Cover and adjust the OUT position as follows:
    • To increase the travel of the Actuator Drive Nut, turn the adjuster clockwise.
    • To decrease the travel of the Actuator Drive Nut, turn the adjuster counterclockwise.

Note: Use a 1/2 in (13 mm) socket to turn the adjuster. Each click of the adjuster will change the Actuator Drive Nut 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​​⁠​​⁠‌⁠‌‍​​​​‍​​​​‌​‍

  1. Hold the Actuator Drive Nut, run the actuator in and out and check both dimensions after each adjustment.
  2. When the Actuator Drive Nut limits are set correctly, replace the Adjuster Cover.

Troubleshooting

ProblemCauseCorrection
ProblemCauseSolution
Poor water pick-upClogged vacuum hoseCheck the vacuum hose and clear/clean as necessary.
Vacuum leaksCheck the squeegee tool and vacuum hose for leaks or cracks and repair/replace as necessary.
The squeegee tilt and/or height is set incorrectly,Adjust the squeegee tilt and/or height as necessary.
The squeegee leaves narrow streaks of water.The blades are dirty or damaged

Remove the squeegee, rinse it under warm water and inspect the blades.

Reverse or replace the blades if they are cut, torn, wavy or worn.

The squeegee lift actuator will not raise or lower the squeegee.

Squeegee actuator overload (error code 11 displayed)

  • Normal current load is 1-2 amps.
  • Max current load is 6 amps.
  • Max current with no load is 1.4 amps.
  1. Check for binding or frozen squeegee lift linkage and excessive weight on the squeegee mount.
  2. Check for a short circuit in the actuator motor and wiring. Repair or replace.

To test the actuator, disconnect the motor plug and attach the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and perform an amp draw test. Compare readings to the current load specifications.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 160, used with permission. SES ref PF-GCAT-6WX4‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​​⁠​​⁠‌⁠‌‍​​​​‍​​​​‌​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 160 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

WARNING! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

Squeegee lift actuator

  1. Remove the Squeegee Tool from the Squeegee Mount Weldment.
  2. Lower the squeegee mount to the floor by pressing the Vacuum/Wand Switch on the control panel.
  3. Once the brush deck is in the lowered position, disconnect the battery pack (push in the Emergency Disconnect) before you turn the key switch off. This will prevent the squeegee from automatically rising when the key is turned off.
  4. Turn the key switch off.
  5. Unplug the squeegee lift motor wiring connector from the machine harness.
Exploded view of the squeegee lift actuator and its mounting: two Clevis Pins, two Cotter Hair Pins and the Squeegee Mount Weldment
Squeegee lift actuator mounting
  1. Go underneath the machine and remove the two Hair Cotter Pins, then slide out (push) both Clevis Pins from their mounting holes to remove the lift actuator from the machine.

Note: New replacement lift actuator motors do not come with the lift drive nut pre-adjusted.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍​‍⁠‌‍‌​​‌‌‌‌​‍‌‍⁠⁠‌

Service Note: After removing the lift actuator, and before installing a new actuator or drive nut, the drive nut and limit switches must be set (or checked) to their correct specifications. Refer to the Lift Actuator Adjustment section (page 159).

  1. After checking or setting the correct actuator lift drive nut dimensions, install the squeegee lift actuator by following the above steps in reverse order.

Service Note: Connect the special actuator power cord adapter to the lift motor as shown in the Lift Actuator Adjustment section to help position the lift actuator for an easier installation.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 161, used with permission. SES ref PF-HPHB-PLJN‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍​‍⁠‌‍‌​​‌‌‌‌​‍‌‍⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 161 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

ComponentSpecifications
Squeegee Actuator MotorType – permanent magnet, 36 VDC, 1/6 HP, reversible
Motor-to-drive-screw ratio – 27.1:1
Performance Data
No Load – Thrust 0 lbs., Speed 39 in/min, 1.4 Amps max.
Full Load – Thrust 600 lbs., Speed 30 in/min, 6.7 ±1 Amps
Start Thrust – 600 lbs.

Shop measurements

Shop measurements are values that were measured on a real machine. While they are not “specifications”, they can help you recognize normal vs abnormal.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​​⁠⁠‍‍​​⁠⁠‍‍‍‍⁠​​‍⁠⁠‌‍‌

Squeegee actuator motor

  • Current draw going up: 2.2 Amps
  • Current draw going down: 1.2 Amps

Special tools

Actuator Power Cord Adapter, p/n 56407502

Actuator power cord adapter: a cord with a rocker switch housing at one end, a motor plug and two alligator clips
Actuator power cord adapter, p/n 56407502
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 162, used with permission. SES ref PF-HCGL-N7LR‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​​⁠⁠‍‍​​⁠⁠‍‍‍‍⁠​​‍⁠⁠‌‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 162 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Steering system

In shortThe steering wheel turns the steer sprocket through the steering shafts and universal joint, and a chain from the sprocket turns the drive wheel. The chain should have about 3/16 in – 1/4 in (4.7 – 6.4 mm) of deflection and stay greased (see page 164).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​​​‌⁠‌‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‍‌‌‍‍‍​‌‌​

Functional description

Drive wheel steering assembly

The steering assembly transfers the steering wheel rotation through the steering shafts and universal joint to the Steer Sprocket at the bottom of the assembly. The Steer Sprocket runs a chain connected to the front spindle weldment to turn the drive wheel left and right.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​​​‌⁠‌‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‍‌‌‍‍‍​‌‌​

Steering wheel and steering column with the Steer Sprocket at the bottom of the column labeled
Steering column and steer sprocket
Exploded view of the drive wheel steering assembly with labels: Bearing Dust Cap, Cotter Pin, Castle Nut, Screw (4), Screw (6), Steer Sprocket, Chain and P-clamp; motor terminals F1, F2, A1 and A2 are marked
Drive wheel steering assembly
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 163, used with permission. SES ref PF-HXJU-PQXC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​​​‌⁠‌‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‍‌‌‍‍‍​‌‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 163 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

WARNING! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

Steering chain

  1. Inspect the chain for looseness and binding.
  2. Adjust the chain tension to 3/16 in – 1/4 in (4.7 – 6.4 mm) deflection by following the instructions in the Removal and Installation/Steering Chain Removal and Tensioning section.
  3. Keep all of the steer chain links greased to prevent excessive wear and binding.

Removal and installation

WARNING! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

Steering chain removal and tensioning

  1. Turn the master key switch off and disconnect the battery pack emergency-stop/battery disconnect.
  1. Loosen the four Screws from underneath the front of the machine and push the Lower Steering Column toward the rear of the machine. This will allow you to separate the Chain from the Steer Sprocket.
  2. Remove both Master Links that secure the Chain to the Steer Plate then remove the Chain from the chassis.
  3. Reinstall the Chain by following the above steps in reverse order.
  4. Adjust the Chain tension so there is about 3/16 in – 1/4 in (4.7 – 6.4 mm) total deflection with moderate pressure applied at the Midpoint as shown.
View from underneath the machine, front at top, showing the four Screws, Lower Steering Column, Steer Sprocket, Chain, Midpoint of the chain, Steer Plate and Master Link
Steering chain removal and tensioning
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 164, used with permission. SES ref PF-MJCY-EU6L‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠‍⁠​‌‍‍‍⁠⁠​‌​‌‍‍‌‌​​‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 164 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Service Note: Use a pry bar or shims between the chassis and steer column to help secure the tension adjustment when tightening the four steering column mounting Screws.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠‍​⁠‍‌‌⁠‌⁠‍‍‍⁠⁠​‍‍⁠⁠​‍

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 165, used with permission. SES ref PF-Q34H-GGMO‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠‍​⁠‍‌‌⁠‌⁠‍‍‍⁠⁠​‍‍⁠⁠​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 165 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Sweep system, side broom

In shortOptional side brooms are offered on cylindrical deck machines only. They are lowered automatically when the scrub system is enabled, and this can be turned on or off in the main control programming options.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‌‍​‌‍‌​‍‍‌‌‌‌⁠⁠‌‍

Functional description

Overview

The optional side brooms are available on cylindrical deck machines only. The two 20 in (50.8 cm) side brooms are mounted at the front corners of the machine and rotate in opposite directions to sweep dirt and debris into the main cylindrical brushes. The main cylindrical brushes then sweep the dirt and debris into a removable hopper.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‌‍​‌‍‌​‍‍‌‌‌‌⁠⁠‌‍

The side broom lift actuator raises and lowers the side brooms via a pivoting arm linkage assembly. The side brooms will be lowered automatically when the scrub system is enabled. Note that this automatic side broom function can be enabled or disabled in the main control programming options. The broom motors will switch on when the drive pedal is moved from the neutral position.

Side broom sweep system wiring diagram

Wiring diagram of the side broom sweep system: 36 volt battery, fuse F4, A1 speed controller, relay K7, circuit breakers F1, F2 and F3, key switch S1, diode D1, seat switch S2, battery interlock switch S3, contactor K5, side broom contactor K6, A2 control board assembly, A3 switch/display panel assembly, side broom actuator M4 and side broom motors M7 and M8
Side broom sweep system wiring diagram
ReferenceLabel printed on the drawing
F4Fuse, 250 A
Battery36V Battery
A1Speed Controller (terminals marked 16, 15, 8, 4, 3, B-, B+)
K7K7 (no other label printed)
F1Circuit Breaker, 3 Amp
S1Key Switch
D1Diode
S2Seat Switch
S3Battery Interlock Switch (for roll-out Battery)
K5K5 (no other label printed)
F2Circuit Breaker, 15 Amp
K6 (lower left)Side Broom Contactor
A2Control Board Assembly (terminals marked Motion, Direction, Bat - (two), Bat +, CAN H, CAN L; line marked Battery Ground)
A3Switch/Display Panel Assembly
M4Side Broom Actuator (leads marked RED and BLK)
F3Circuit Breaker, 20 Amp
K6 (bottom, terminals 1 and 2)Side Broom Contactor
M7Side Broom Motor
M8Side Broom Motor
TerminalsB+ (two) and B-
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 166, used with permission. SES ref PF-O3PQ-C2UH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‌‍​‌‍‌​‍‍‌‌‌‌⁠⁠‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 166 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Circuit description

The coil side of contactor K6 gets positive voltage from the Battery when the load side of contactor K5 is closed. Contactor K5 closes when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K5 coil to battery ground. Contactor K6 is connected to battery ground through the A2 Control Board Assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‍⁠​‌‍⁠⁠‌⁠​⁠‌⁠⁠

The Side Broom Motors M7 and M8 get positive voltage from the Battery when the load side of contactor K6 is closed. Contactor K6 closes when the A2 Control Board Assembly connects the K6 coil to battery ground. The Side Broom Motors M7 and M8 are connected directly to battery ground.

The Side Broom Actuator M4 gets voltage from the A2 Control Board Assembly which switches the polarity to move the side brooms up or down. When the A2 Control Board Assembly receives a signal from the A3 Switch/Display Panel Assembly via the CAN BUS that the operator has pressed the scrub on switch, the A2 Control Board Assembly sends the appropriate voltage to the Side Broom Actuator M4 to lower the side brooms to the operating position.

Component locations

The Side Broom Assemblies are mounted onto the Side Broom Bracket Weldments using parallel Links, sleeve bearings, bushings and fasteners.

The Side Broom Lift Actuator is mounted horizontally is attached to the machine frame and Lift Arm with clevis pins. The Lift Arm is connected via short chains to the Side Broom Assemblies. As the Side Broom Lift Actuator retracts and extends, it pivots the Lift Arm to raise and lower the Side Broom Assemblies.

Exploded view of the side broom system with labels: Side Broom Bracket Weldment (2), Link (4), Side Broom Assembly (2), Lift Arm and Side Broom Lift Actuator
Side broom components
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 167, used with permission. SES ref PF-M5AU-NAMF‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‍⁠​‌‍⁠⁠‌⁠​⁠‌⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 167 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

WARNING! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

Side broom height adjustment

The height of the side brooms is determined by the length of time the side broom actuator runs as it lowers the side brooms. Note that:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌⁠⁠​‌⁠​​‍‌​‍⁠‌‍​‌​‍⁠‍⁠

  • Increasing the side broom actuator run time lowers the side broom height.
  • Decreasing the side broom actuator run time raises the side broom height.

To adjust the side broom height:

  1. Turn the key switch off.
  2. Press and hold the side broom on/down and scrub off switches.
  3. While holding the switches, turn the key switch on.
  4. Continue to hold the switches until the side broom on/down indicator, scrub off indicator and both scrub on indicators turn on.
  5. Release the switches. The indicators will stay on and the display will now show the side broom actuator down run time in seconds.
    • Press the scrub on switch to increase the side broom actuator run time and lower the position of side brooms.
    • Press the side broom on/down switch to decrease the side broom actuator run time and raise the position of side brooms.
  6. Press the scrub off switch to save the side broom height. The actuator will rise to its up position and the display will show a key switch icon.
  7. Turn the key switch off. The machine is now reprogrammed to work with the new side broom height setting.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 168, used with permission. SES ref PF-3LVL-SMMF‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌⁠⁠​‌⁠​​‍‌​‍⁠‌‍​‌​‍⁠‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 168 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Lift actuator adjustment

This section explains the steps for adjusting the actuator drive nut (Spring Housing Assembly) setting for the lift actuator motor.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​‍‍‌‌‌‍‍‍⁠‍⁠‍​⁠​⁠⁠⁠​‌‌

Using the actuator power cord adapter

The adjacent drawing shows the special actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) that is needed to connect the machine’s battery pack and actuator motor for setting the actuator drive nut limit settings. To connect the actuator power cord adapter:

Actuator power cord adapter: a cord with a rocker switch housing at one end, a motor plug and two alligator clips
Actuator power cord adapter, p/n 56407502
  1. Open the machine battery compartment and disconnect the battery connector. The battery pack is needed to power the lift actuator motor to correctly set the IN and OUT limit switches.
  2. Connect the actuator motor to be tested to the power cord adapter end.
  3. Connect the alligator clips from the cord adapter (red clip to the positive and black to negative) to battery connector or battery posts. Use the rocker switch on the actuator power cord adapter to change the motor rotation when setting the correct actuator drive nut dimensions.

Service Note: You can use the above actuator power cord adapter to help position the drive nut/spring housing assembly (in or out) for ease in actuator motor installations.

Lift actuator drive nut adjustment

  1. Hold onto the Actuator Drive Nut and press the rocker switch on the actuator power cord adapter to run the drive motor and retract the Actuator Drive Nut toward the motor housing (the IN limit) until the motor stops.
  2. Measure the position of the Actuator Drive Nut on the actuator shaft. Manually turn the Actuator Drive Nut (steel tube) to the IN position as shown in the table on the following page for the specific actuator motor needing adjustment.
Side view of a lift actuator showing the Adjuster Cover, the Actuator Drive Nut, and the IN and OUT position dimensions measured from the motor housing
Actuator drive nut IN and OUT positions

Note: All adjustment settings are measured out of the machine (not attached).

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 169, used with permission. SES ref PF-Z3PQ-MUC6‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​‍‍‌‌‌‍‍‍⁠‍⁠‍​⁠​⁠⁠⁠​‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 169 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Hold the Actuator Drive Nut then press the adapter cord rocker switch to run the drive motor to the OUT position (wait until the motor stops).
  2. Measure the position of the Actuator Drive Nut on the shaft and compare the measurement with the OUT position shown in the table below.
Part #Actuator MotorActuator Drive Nut IN PositionActuator Drive Nut OUT PositionModels
56413129Side Broom Lift1-5/8 in (4.12 cm)3-1/8 in (7.93 cm)Cylindrical w/side brooms
  1. If the OUT measurement doesn’t match the dimension shown in the table, remove the Adjuster Cover and adjust the OUT position as follows:
    • To increase the travel of the Actuator Drive Nut, turn the adjuster clockwise.
    • To decrease the travel of the Actuator Drive Nut, turn the adjuster counterclockwise.

Note: Use a 1/2 in (13 mm) socket to turn the adjuster. Each click of the adjuster will change the Actuator Drive Nut 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‍‌⁠⁠​​‌​‍⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠​‍‌​

  1. Hold the Actuator Drive Nut, run the actuator in and out and check both dimensions after each adjustment.
  2. When the Actuator Drive Nut limits are set correctly, replace the Adjuster Cover.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 170, used with permission. SES ref PF-CIVZ-77YA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‍‌⁠⁠​​‌​‍⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠​‍‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 170 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

ProblemCauseCorrection
Poor sweeping performanceBrushes are worn or damagedCheck and replace the brushes as necessary.
The broom height is not set correctly.Check and reset the broom height. Refer to the Side Broom Height Adjustment section (page 168).
The brush gearmotor is not operating correctly.Check the gearmotor current draw with no load (6 amps nominal). Replace the gearmotor if necessary.
A side broom motors will not run.

K6 Side broom motor contactor coil overload (error code 16 displayed)‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​‌‌⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‌‌‍‌⁠‍‌

The nominal coil resistance is 100 ohms.

  1. Check for a K6 coil wiring problem or short circuit (wire colors VIO and BRN/BLK).
  2. Check the coil resistance. If the resistance is below 80 ohms, replace the contactor.
Side broom motor contactor coil open (error code 36 displayed)
  1. Check for open circuit in the K6 coil and wiring (wire colors VIO and BRN/BLK).
  2. Test for 36V at the K6 coil. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
K6 Side broom motor contactor coil short to ground (error code 37 displayed)
  1. Disconnect the K6 coil wiring (wire colors VIO and BRN/BLK) and check to see if the code disappears.
    • If the code disappears, replace the K6 contactor.
    • If the code does reappear, test the wiring for a short back to the battery ground. Repair or replace the defective wire.
  2. If the above test doesn’t remove the code, substitute a new A2 control board assembly.
The side brooms will not extend or retract.

Side broom actuator overload (error code 17 displayed)

  • Normal current load is 1-2 amps.
  • Max current load is 6 amps.
  • Max current with no load is 1.4 amps.
  1. Check for binding or frozen side broom lift linkage and excessive weight on the lifting arms.
  2. Check for a short circuit in the actuator motor and wiring. Repair or replace.

To test the actuator, disconnect the motor plug and attach the actuator power cord adapter (p/n 56407502) and perform an amp draw test. Compare readings to the current load specifications.

Side broom actuator motor open (error code 38 displayed)
  1. Use an ohmmeter to check for an open circuit in the M4 side broom actuator and its wiring (wire colors GRA/VIO and GRN/ORN). If defective, repair or replace.
  2. Test for 36V at side broom actuator. If 0 Volts, check the A2 control board assembly.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 171, used with permission. SES ref PF-YHLT-HUXP‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​‌‌⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‌‌‍‌⁠‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 171 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

WARNING! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

Side broom lift actuator

Note: New replacement lift actuator motors do not come with the lift drive nut pre-adjusted.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​​⁠​​‌⁠‌⁠​‍‍‍‍‌​‍‌‍​‍​

  1. Remove the scrub deck. (Refer to the Removal and Installation/Scrub Brush Deck instructions in the Scrub System, Cylindrical section of this manual.)
  2. The side broom lift actuator motor is located underneath the left front of the machine ahead of its side skirt. Cut the wiring tie strap if needed, then disconnect the wiring connector at the motor.
Exploded view of the side broom lift actuator mounting with labels: Side Broom Lift Actuator, Lift Arm, two Clevis Pins and two Cotter Hair Pins
Side broom lift actuator mounting
  1. Pull out the two Cotter Hair Pins, then remove the two Clevis Pins holding the motor at the frame and Lift Arm mounts.

Service Note: It may be helpful to lift up and down on the Lift Arm to relieve any preload pressure on the Clevis Pins when removing the front Clevis Pin.

  1. Drop the Side Broom Lift Actuator out from underneath the machine to remove it.

Note: New replacement lift actuator motors do not come with the lift drive nut pre-adjusted.

Service Note: After removing the lift actuator, and before installing a new actuator or drive nut, the drive nut and limit switches must be set (or checked) to their correct specifications. Refer to the Lift Actuator Adjustment section (page 169).

  1. After checking or setting the correct actuator lift drive nut dimensions, install the side broom lift actuator by following the above steps in reverse order.

Service Note: Connect the special actuator power cord adapter to the lift motor as shown in the Lift Actuator Adjustment section to help position the lift actuator for an easier installation of the Clevis Pins.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 172, used with permission. SES ref PF-KJJ6-GIUS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​​⁠​​‌⁠‌⁠​‍‍‍‍‌​‍‌‍​‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 172 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Side broom gearmotor

  1. Remove the Side Broom Retainer Pin, then pull down on the Side Broom and remove it from the motor shaft.
  2. Disconnect the motor wiring connector from the main machine harness. Note that you may need to cut the tie straps to do this.
  3. Remove the fasteners holding the Gearmotor Assembly to the Side Broom Bracket Weldment.
  4. Install the Side Broom Motor by following the above steps in reverse order.
  5. Note that the position of the mounting screws inside the three Die Springs set the spring tension for the side broom front and side impact breakaway.

    Once you’ve reinstalled the Gearmotor Assembly, adjust the mounting screws inside the Die Springs to the dimensions shown in the detail drawing above.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‌‌‍​‌‍​⁠‌​⁠‍‍‌‌‌‌‍‌⁠‍⁠

  6. Test the side broom Gearmotor Assembly for correct operation.
Exploded view of the side broom gearmotor with labels: Die Spring (2), Die Spring, Gearmotor Assembly, Side Broom Bracket Weldment, Side Broom Retainer Pin and Side Broom; the detail view prints 4X ADJUST TO 1.65 - 1.70 and 2X (1.50-1.56)
Side broom gearmotor and die springs

Detail drawing dimensions as printed (no units are printed on the drawing): 4X ADJUST TO 1.65 - 1.70; 2X (1.50-1.56).

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 173, used with permission. SES ref PF-2GO6-KIUJ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‌‌‍​‌‍​⁠‌​⁠‍‍‌‌‌‌‍‌⁠‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 173 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

ComponentSpecifications
Side Broom GearmotorType – permanent magnet, 36 VDC
Gearbox – 27:1 ratio
Power – 162 Watts
Output – 105 in-lbs. @ 84 RPM
Current – 6 Amps
Side Broom Actuator MotorType – permanent magnet, 36 VDC, 1/6 HP, reversible
Motor-to-drive-screw ratio – 21.7:1
Performance Data
No Load – Thrust 0 lbs., Speed 39 ±4 in/min, 1.4 Amps max.
Full Load – Thrust 600 lbs., Speed 30 ±3 in/min, 6.7 ±1 Amps
Start Thrust – 600 lbs.

Corrected an obvious misprint: “Gearnotor” printed in the component column (now Gearmotor, as on page 173).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍‌​

Shop measurements

Shop measurements are values that were measured on a real machine. While they are not “specifications”, they can help you recognize normal vs abnormal.

Side broom contactor (K6)

Resistance at room temperature: 93 ohms

Side broom motor

Current draw for one motor with no load (broom off): 1.5-1.8 Amps

Current draw in use on dry floor: 4.0-4.2 Amps

Side broom actuator motor

  • Current draw going up: 2.4 Amps
  • Current draw going down: 1.2 Amps
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 174, used with permission. SES ref PF-SOWQ-YHVI‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 174 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Special tools

Actuator Power Cord Adapter, p/n 56407502‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​‍‌‍​⁠‍​‌‍​‌​⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍‍‍‍‌

Actuator power cord adapter: a cord with a rocker switch housing at one end, a motor plug and two alligator clips
Actuator power cord adapter, p/n 56407502
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 175, used with permission. SES ref PF-K4XU-2WVM‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​‍‌‍​⁠‍​‌‍​‌​⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍‍‍‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 175 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wheel system, non-traction

In shortThe rear (non-traction) wheels hold up the back of the machine, and the brake system is part of this system. The brake pedal pulls a cable that works an equalizer so both brakes get equal tension, and the pedal can be locked to act as a parking brake.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍‍​​‍‌⁠‍​​‌‌‍​‌​‍​‌‌​⁠

Functional description

Overview

The non-traction wheel system supports the rear of the machine and includes the braking system.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍‍​​‍‌⁠‍​​‌‌‍​‌​‍​‌‌​⁠

Component locations

The Non-traction (rear) Wheels are attached to the brake Spindles and are held on the frame shafts by a M10-1.5 x 0.79 in (20 mm) hex screw and washer.

The Brake Pedal Assembly actuates the Brakes via a Cable Assembly. The Brake Pedal Assembly can be locked with the Brakes engaged to act as a parking brake.

The Cable Assembly actuates an Equalizer that ensures the tension from the Cable Assembly is applied equally to both brakes.

Exploded view of the rear frame and non-traction wheels with labels: Brake Pedal Assembly, Cable Assembly, Non-traction Wheel (2), Spindle (2) and Equalizer
Non-traction wheel and brake components
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 176, used with permission. SES ref PF-NYKQ-QMVL‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍‍​​‍‌⁠‍​​‌‌‍​‌​‍​‌‌​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 176 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance and adjustments

Warning! Before performing any machine maintenance or adjustments, make sure the key switch is off and the key is removed from the machine. Chock both rear wheels so the machine can’t roll.
In shortBrake feel on the pedal is set at the brake cable, and this page covers that adjustment. Set the thread exposure at the Anchor Nuts and Equalizer Yoke as shown, then tighten the Anchor Locknuts. Test-ride the machine after any brake adjustment. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠​‍‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠​​‌⁠‍‍‌‍‍

Brake cable adjustment

Caution! Always test-ride the machine after making any adjustments to the brake system to confirm that the braking system is operating correctly.
  1. Make sure the parking brake lever is in the released (off) position.
  2. Adjust the front brake cable Anchor Nuts so approximately 3/8 in (10 mm) of the threads is exposed as shown, then tighten Anchor Nuts.
  3. Install a new Tie Strap to the chassis as a cable guide. Allow a small amount of cable movement through the Tie Strap. There should be about 1/2 in (13 mm) of clearance between the Tie Strap and the chassis as shown.
  4. Check that the left rear brake housing threaded end is about flush with the end of the threads in the (adjustable) Clevis Yoke.
  5. Adjust the cable at the Equalizer Yoke so 1/4 in (6 mm) of the threads is exposed.
  6. Adjust the connection at the Equalizer Yoke to obtain a snug brake pedal with no free play, then tighten the Anchor Locknuts.
Exploded drawing of the brake cable and pedal bracket above the chassis, with callouts for the Anchor Nuts (3/8 in (10 mm) of thread exposed), Equalizer Yoke (1/4 in (6 mm) of thread exposed), Anchor Locknuts, Clevis Yoke and the Tie Strap (1/2 in clearance; brake cable should move freely within cable tie)
Brake cable adjustment points
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 177, used with permission. SES ref PF-TJ7J-R7AO‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠​‍‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠​​‌⁠‍‍‌‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 177 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Brake caliper pad wear adjustment

Caution! Always test-ride the machine after making any adjustments to the brake system to confirm that the braking system is operating correctly.

Note: The Brake Arm must not bottom out against the front slot on the caliper.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠​‍​⁠⁠‌⁠‌​⁠​⁠‌

  1. Loosen the large outer Locknut.
  2. Insert a flat 0.035 in (0.89 mm) feeler gauge between one of the brake pads and the brake disc.
  3. Loosen the locknut, then turn the inner caliper Adjustment Screw in until the pad is lightly touching the feeler gauge.
  4. Tighten the Locknut.
  5. After making the adjustment, make sure the machine can be pushed easily when the brake pedal is not engaged.
Right side brake caliper with callouts for the Brake Arm, Adjustment Screw and Locknut; an arrow marks the front of the machine
Right side caliper
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 178, used with permission. SES ref PF-AUKN-YHZS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠​‍​⁠⁠‌⁠‌​⁠​⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 178 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

ProblemCauseCorrection
Poor braking performanceThe brakes are out of adjustment

Adjust the brake cable as necessary. (Refer to the Brake Cable Adjustment section.)‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠​​‌⁠​​‍​‌​‍‌​‌‌​⁠‍‍

If the brake cable is stretched to the point where it cannot be adjusted to provide good braking performance, replace the brake cable assembly.

Adjust the brake caliper to compensate for pad wear. (Refer to the Brake Caliper Pad Wear Adjustment section.)

If the brake pads are worn to the point where the brake calipers cannot be adjusted to provide good braking performance, replace the brake pads.

Contamination on the brake padsClean or replace the brake pads as necessary.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 179, used with permission. SES ref PF-KCIU-HISZ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠​​‌⁠​​‍​‌​‍‌​‌‌​⁠‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 179 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

Warning! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off and the key is removed from the machine.
Install wood blocking or chocks in front of and behind the front drive wheel to prevent the machine from rolling.

Brake cable replacement

  1. Remove the floor plate to access the cable assembly at the brake pedal.
  2. Loosen the Locknut on the cable end Mounting Bolt, then remove the Mounting Bolt and cable end.
  3. Loosen the cable casing Anchor Nuts and pull the cable free from its mount bracket on the chassis.
  4. Locate a plastic Tie Strap on the lower left side of the chassis at midpoint, then cut the Tie Strap to free the cable at that point.
  5. Unclip the cable Clevis Yoke at the left brake caliper at the arm and separate.
  6. Loosen the cable Anchor Locknuts at the Equalizer Yoke mounting bracket. The cable assembly is now completely disconnected.
  7. Attach a new cable to the end of the old cable at the brake pedal, then pull the old cable out and pull the new cable through the chassis.
  8. Follow the above steps in reverse to reconnect the cable.
  9. Follow the steps in the Brake Cable Adjustment section below to adjust the brake for correct operation.
Exploded drawing of the brake pedal bracket, pulley and brake cable above the chassis, with the cable routed to the left rear brake; inset shows the cable in its tie strap with 1/2 in clearance (brake cable should move freely within cable tie)
Brake cable routing
Parts for this job
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 180, used with permission. SES ref PF-IMEJ-L4JB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‍​‌​​​‌‍⁠​‍⁠‌⁠⁠‌‍⁠⁠​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 180 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Rear wheel and brake caliper

  1. Remove the Cotter Pin and washer from the Brake Linkage Rod and disconnect the Brake Linkage Rod from the top brake arm mounting hole.
  2. Remove the Cotter Pin and washer from the Brake Linkage Rod and disconnect the Brake Linkage Rod from the brake arm mounting hole.
  3. Loosen the M10-1.5 x 20mm Hex Screw holding the Rear Wheel to the axle.
  4. Position a suitable jack underneath the wheel axle and jack up the machine so the wheel is approximately 1 in (2.5 cm) off the floor.
Exploded drawing of the rear wheel, brake rotor, brake arm and brake linkage rod, with callouts for the Cotter Pin, Brake Linkage Rod, Brake Arm, Brake Rotor, Rear Wheel and the M10-1.5 x 20mm Hex Screw
Rear wheel and brake assembly
Warning! Place wood blocking under the rear axle as the machine is only being supported by the jack. This is to prevent any accidents or machine damage when the wheel is off of the machine.
  1. Remove the M10-1.5 x 20mm Hex Screw and washer and carefully pull the complete wheel and brake assembly off the axle.
  2. If you are replacing the wheel:
    1. Remove the four M10-1.5 x 30mm Hex Screws and nuts holding the Brake Rotor to the Rear Wheel hub.
    2. Reattach the salvaged Brake Rotor to the new Rear Wheel hub.
  3. To reinstall the wheel and brake assembly:
    1. Place the brake caliper onto the rotor. Adjust the gap between the pads and the rotor to 0.035 in (0.89 mm) using a feeler gauge. See Brake Caliper Pad Wear Adjustment.
    2. While holding the caliper on the rotor, and aligning the caliper slots with the chassis, slide the wheel and brake assembly onto the axle.
    3. Install the M10-1.5 x 20mm Hex Screw and washer to fasten the Rear Wheel to the axle.

      Service Note: Apply a small amount of Loctite 242 (blue) thread sealant to the M10-1.5 x 20mm Hex Screw to prevent the screw from loosening.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠​‍​​​⁠​‌‌‍‌‍‍‍​​‌​

    4. Remove the wood blocking from the rear axle, then lower the jack.
    5. Reconnect the Brake Linkage Rod to the brake arm top hole and reinstall the washer and Cotter Pin.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 181, used with permission. SES ref PF-BAKC-VVHH‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠​‍​​​⁠​‌‌‍‌‍‍‍​​‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 181 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wheel system, traction

Functional description

In shortOne front wheel both drives and steers the machine. The drive pedal sensor tells the wheel drive controller what you want, and the controller runs the three-phase AC drive motor to move forward or in reverse. Pages 188 through 198 cover the controller fault codes.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍⁠‍⁠‍‌‍⁠‌⁠‍‍‌​‍​‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌

A single front wheel provides both traction drive and steering. The major components of the drive wheel system are the drive pedal, wheel drive controller and drive wheel motor assembly. The drive wheel is mounted to a front spindle which carries the vehicle load and provides a steering pivot. The gearbox is driven by a brush-less three phase AC motor. The drive wheel controller directly operates the drive motor based on input requests from the drive pedal sensor (potentiometer) which is mounted on the side of the drive pedal. If you push the pedal forward, the machine will move forward. If you push it farther forward, the machine will increase speed. If you push the pedal backward, the machine will move in reverse. The drive pedal is spring loaded in the center or “neutral” position.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍⁠‍⁠‍‌‍⁠‌⁠‍‍‌​‍​‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌

Drive pedal with the potentiometer sensor on its side, labeled Potentiometer
Fig. 1: Drive pedal with sensor (potentiometer)
Wheel drive controller with its bolt-on connector lugs and low-current connector
Fig. 2: Wheel drive controller
Drive motor assembly mounted at the front wheel
Fig. 3: Drive motor assembly

Drive pedal

The drive pedal is spring loaded in the neutral position. The drive pedal position sensor is a potentiometer mounted on the side of the pedal that tracks the pedal position. The sensor is pre-adjusted and comes with the pedal assembly.

Wheel drive controller

The wheel drive controller is a self contained sealed unit. It controls when and how the current flows to the stator windings to rotate the motor based primarily on the drive pedal sensor input, but it also monitors rotational speed sensors and a temperature sensor inside the motor.

The wheel drive controller has 5 bolt-on connector lugs. Two for battery positive and negative supply and three for the motor U, V and W circuits. There is also a single “low current” connector.

Drive wheel motor assembly

The drive wheel motor assembly consists of a wheel, gear box and a brush-less three phase AC motor. The motor drives the wheel through a gearbox. The wheel drive motor can change rotation direction to propel the machine both forward and backward.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 182, used with permission. SES ref PF-S3NP-DS37‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍⁠‍⁠‍‌‍⁠‌⁠‍‍‌​‍​‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 182 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wheel motor, temp sensor and encoder

The drive wheel motor assembly contains an AC motor, temperature sensor and an encoder. The AC motor consists of an outer stator and a rotor. The temperature sensor is embedded in the stator windings. There is a magnetic ring attached to the rotor. The encoder is attached to the gearbox case and “reads” the magnetic ring as it spins with the rotor.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠‍‍​‌‌​‍‍‌⁠​‍​⁠⁠​‍‍⁠​⁠

Rotor with the magnetic ring on its shaft, labeled Magnetic ring
Fig. 4: Rotor with magnetic ring
Stator windings with the temperature sensor wires labeled
Fig. 5: Stator with temp sensor
Encoder mounted on the gearbox case, labeled Encoder and wiring
Fig. 6: Encoder

The motor stator windings are connected to the U, V and W cables, which are attached directly to the wheel drive controller. The wheel drive controller energizes the motor stator windings in a timed sequence to simulate a magnetic field moving around the outer perimeter of the motor. This moving magnetic field acts upon the armature causing it to rotate.

An encoder inside the drive wheel motor serves as the “eyes” of the wheel drive controller so that it can see if the motor turned in the direction that it was trying to move it and how fast it is moving. The encoder is a solid state “sensor” which converts motor rotation into a pair of 5 volt square wave patterns. The encoder reads the magnetic ring that is attached to the rotor and spins with the rotor. The patterns are offset so that the controller can “see” which direction the motor is rotating. See Figure 7 showing the blue pattern to the right of the red one when moving forward. See Figure 8 showing the blue pattern to the left fo the red one when moving in reverse. As the motor speed increases, the frequency of the patterns increase. See Figure 9.

Oscilloscope trace of the two encoder square-wave patterns, blue pattern to the right of the red one, motor moving forward
Fig. 7: Encoder, forward
Oscilloscope trace of the two encoder square-wave patterns, blue pattern to the left of the red one, motor moving in reverse
Fig. 8: Encoder, reverse
Oscilloscope trace of the two encoder patterns at higher motor speed, with many more pulses in the same time span
Fig. 9: Encoder, increased speed
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 183, used with permission. SES ref PF-UZC7-ZJGU‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠‍‍​‌‌​‍‍‌⁠​‍​⁠⁠​‍‍⁠​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 183 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Circuit description

The wheel drive controller takes in DC power at the battery positive and negative lugs and converts it to an AC output to rotate the wheel drive motor. The drive pedal potentiometer is the primary input to the controller, but it also looks at the wheel drive motor temperature and encoder signals. In addition to driving the motor, the wheel drive controller also provides outputs to communicate with the “main” (A2) Control Board.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠‍⁠‍‍⁠‌​‍‌⁠⁠​​‌⁠⁠‍⁠​‌‌

Wheel drive controller power-up

The battery negative connection is “hard-wired”. The battery positive connection is switched on by the Main Contactor (K7). The initial power up sequence begins when key on positive voltage is received at X6-1. This “wakes up” the controller. If there is a positive voltage on the “interlock” circuit X6-9, from the seat switch and the battery interlock switch, the controller turns on the main relay by providing a path to battery negative on X6-6 for the main contactor winding. The main contactor switches on a high current capacity battery positive feed to the B+ lug on the wheel drive controller.

The controller must receive a positive voltage on the “interlock” circuit X6-9 before it will engage the motor. The interlock circuit is supplied through the seat switch and the battery interlock switch. If either of these is open, it will disable the wheel drive motor for safety purposes.

Note: The battery interlock switch is only used when the machine is equipped with a single large “mono-block” battery. However, the interlock switch connector will be bridged by a “jumper” if the switch is not used on the machine.

Motion and direction circuits

The wheel drive controller informs the “main” (A2) Control Board when the vehicle is moving. This MOTION circuit uses a dedicated wire that runs between the two controllers to communicate this information.

Motion circuit schematic. In the (A2) Main Control Board box, +V feeds through a resistor to an Input and to a wire running to the Wheel Drive Controller box, where it reaches a switch whose other side goes to B-
Motion circuit between the main control board and the wheel drive controller

The main controller provides a positive voltage, through a resistor to a switch inside the wheel drive controller. The other side of the switch is connected to battery negative. When the vehicle is stationary, the switch is open and the input voltage is “high”. When the vehicle is in MOTION, the switch closes, which drains the voltage supply to battery negative, causing the input to drop to “low”.

The wheel drive controller also tells the “main” controller which direction the vehicle is moving. There is an additional dedicated wire for this circuit and it works in the same way as the “Motion” circuit. When the vehicle is moving forward, the switch is open and the input is high. When the vehicle is moving in reverse, the switch closes, causing the input to go low.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 184, used with permission. SES ref PF-P6JC-Y7I5‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‍⁠‍⁠‍‍⁠‌​‍‌⁠⁠​​‌⁠⁠‍⁠​‌‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 184 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Fault circuit

The wheel drive controller informs the “main” (A2) Control Board when it has set a fault code using a single wire that functions much like the motion and direction circuits.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠​‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠‍‌

Mode 1 and mode 2 circuits

The (A2) “main” Control Board informs the wheel drive controller how it wants it to control the drive wheel using two circuits “mode 1” and “mode 2”. Each circuit is a logic circuit where the voltage is either low or high. The drive speed is normally slowed down while scrubbing unless the operator chooses to press the scrub speed switch to increase the speed. The operator can also request reduced torque and speed on slippery surfaces using the traction control switch.

Potentiometer

The drive pedal has a three wire potentiometer attached to its side. The potentiometer tracks the angle or “position” of the drive paddle. The A1 Wheel drive controller supplies a 5 volt potential across the resistive strip of the potentiometer on the “POT high” and “POT low” wires. The “POT wiper” circuit returns a portion of the voltage back to the A1 wheel drive controller as an analog input which is proportional to the position of the pedal. The potentiometer is part of a new drive pedal assemble and comes pre-adjusted from the factory.

Motor temperature sensor

The motor temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor It has two wires. One is connected to battery negative inside the wheel drive controller. The other is a 5 volt supply through a resistor from the controller. The controller reads the voltage between the internal resistor and the temperature sensor.

Temperature sensor circuit schematic. In the Wheel Drive Controller box, +5V feeds through a resistor to an Input and out to the Temperature Sensor (a variable resistor) inside the Wheel Drive Motor circle; the sensor's other side returns to B- on the controller
Motor temperature sensor circuit
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 185, used with permission. SES ref PF-YXER-BIR7‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠​‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠‍‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 185 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Encoder

The encoder is a solid state device and requires a power supply in order to work. The power supply is provided by the wheel drive controller. It has two transistor switches that open and close as the magnetic ring rotates. Each switch is provided a 5 volt supply from the controller, through a resistor. The controller monitors the voltage between the internal resistor and the encoder switch. When the switch is open, the input is 5v or “high”. When the switch closes, the input is 0v or “low”.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠⁠​​‍‌⁠​​⁠​‍⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‌​⁠⁠

Encoder circuit schematic. In the Wheel Drive Controller box, +5V feeds through two resistors to the Phase A input and Phase B input and on to two switches in the Encoder box; a separate +5V line goes to the encoder Power Supply and B- returns from the encoder
Encoder circuit
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 186, used with permission. SES ref PF-IX6Z-SCO3‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠⁠​​‍‌⁠​​⁠​‍⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‌​⁠⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 186 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Component locations

  • Drive Wheel Assembly
  • Wheel Drive Controller
  • Drive Pedal with potentiometer
  • Seat Switch S2
  • Battery Interlock Switch S3
Photo of the operator area with callouts for the Wheel Drive Controller and the Drive Pedal
Wheel drive controller and drive pedal
Photo of the underside of the seat with a callout for the Seat Switch
Seat switch
Photo of the front of the machine with a callout for the Drive Wheel Assembly
Drive wheel assembly
Photo of the machine's battery area with a circled close-up and callout for the Battery Interlock Switch
Battery interlock switch
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 187, used with permission. SES ref PF-M7PF-PSKI‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​‌‌‍‌​​​​‍‍​⁠‍‍⁠​⁠‌​‌⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 187 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting

In shortFor any drive problem, check for fault codes first. The main control board shows error 03 on the display when the wheel drive controller has set a fault, and it flashes the specific code on the detergent switch LED. You can also read the code from the controller’s Status LED or a Curtis hand-held programmer. The wheel drive is intentionally disabled if the interlock circuit (seat switch and battery interlock switch) is open.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠⁠⁠​​‍‍‌‌‍‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍⁠

If there is a problem with the wheel drive system, begin by checking for any fault codes. If there is a fault code, diagnose the cause of the code. If there are no fault codes, check the wheel drive controller status LED for clues and use the shop measurements in the specifications section to systematically check the voltage at every low current connector wire looking for something abnormal. And remember that the system is intentionally disabled if the interlock circuit (seat switch and battery interlock switch) is open.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠⁠⁠​​‍‍‌‌‍‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍⁠

Fault codes

The drive controller has very robust fault code capabilities. When the wheel drive controller sets a fault, it communicates the fault to the “main” control board. The main control board displays an error 03 message on the LCD display and flashes out the specific wheel drive controller fault code using the control panel detergent switch LED.

Control panel with callouts: the detergent switch LED flashes out the wheel drive controller fault code, and the LCD shows main controller fault code 03, meaning there is a wheel drive controller fault code
Control panel showing fault code 03 and the flashing detergent LED

Since most problems will result in setting a fault code, whenever there is a problem with the drive system, the first thing you should do is check for fault codes. Fault codes can be obtained by counting the flash out code of the detergent LED, counting the flash code of the Status LED on the wheel drive controller or by using a Curtis hand-held programmer.

  1. Counting the detergent LED flash code
    1. The codes consist of two digits. The LED flashes the first digit, followed by a short pause, then flashes the second digit followed by a long pause before flashing out the next code. All active codes will continue to flash out. You count each “on” flash of the LED. The key is to watch until you get the rhythm and can identify the long pause. Start counting immediately after the long pause. Example: (long pause) is a code 23 that has repeated.
  2. Counting the wheel drive controller status LED flash code
    Wheel drive controller connector area with the Status LED labeled
    Fig. 10: Status LED
    Fault code 23 example sequence: one red flash (first digit follows), two yellow flashes (first digit 2), two red flashes (second digit follows), three yellow flashes (second digit 3)
    Fig. 11: Example: Fault Code 23
    1. A single Status LED on the wheel drive controller is used to flash out all currently active codes. The Status LED illuminates either red or yellow color light. Each code consists of two digits. The
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 188, used with permission. SES ref PF-AW6H-672S‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠⁠⁠​​‍‍‌‌‍‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 188 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

LED flashes RED once to indicate that the first digit of the code will follow; the LED then flashes YELLOW the appropriate number of times for the first digit. The LED flashes RED twice to indicate that the second digit of the code will follow; the LED flashes YELLOW the appropriate number of times for the second digit.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​‍‌⁠⁠⁠​​‌‌​⁠‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠‌‌​

    1. The numerical codes used by the yellow LED are listed in the troubleshooting chart, which also lists possible fault causes and describes the conditions that set and clear each fault.
  1. Using a Curtis hand-held programmer.
    Curtis 1313 hand-held programmer with coiled cable
    Fig. 12: 1313 programmer
    Hand holding the programmer connector in the electrical panel
    Fig. 13: Programmer connector
    1. The 1313 programmer or the 1311 programmer will display all faults that are currently set as well as a history of the faults that have been set since the history log was last cleared. The programmer displays the faults by name. To use the programmer, connect it to the programmer connector located in the electrical panel by the bank of contactors. Refer to a Curtis industries operator’s manual for the programmer you are using for more information.

Summary of LED display formats

The status LED has four different display modes, indicating the type of information they are providing.

Types of LED display
DisplayStatus
Neither LED illuminatedController is not powered on; or vehicle has dead battery; or severe damage.
Yellow LED flashingController is operating normally.
Yellow and red LEDs both on solidController is in Flash program mode.
Red LED on solidNo software loaded, or an internal hardware fault detected by the Supervisor or Primary microprocessor. Cycle KSI to clear. Reload software or replace controller if necessary.
Red LED and yellow LED flashing alternatelyController has detected a fault. 2-digit code flashed by yellow LED identifies the specific fault; one or two flashes by red LED indicate whether first or second code digit will follow.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 189, used with permission. SES ref PF-U3FX-L2DO‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​‍‌⁠⁠⁠​​‌‌​⁠‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠‌‌​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 189 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Fault code table (troubleshooting chart)

The troubleshooting chart, provides the following information on each wheel drive controller fault:‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠⁠​‍⁠‌⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‍‍

  • Fault code
  • Fault name as displayed on the programmer’s LCD
  • The effect of the fault
  • Possible causes of the fault
  • Fault set conditions
  • Fault clear conditions.

Whenever a fault is encountered and no wiring or vehicle fault can be found, shut off KSI (Key Switch) and turn it back on to see if the fault clears. If it does not, shut off KSI and remove the low current 35-pin connector from the drive controller. Check the connector for corrosion or damage, clean it if necessary, and re-insert it.

Note: Some of the codes listed in the table are for circuits that are not utilized on the SC6500.

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
12#Controller Overcurrent

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump

  1. External short of phase U,V, or W motor connections.
  2. Motor parameters are mis-tuned.
  3. Controller defective.
  4. Speed encoder noise problems.

Set: Phase current exceeded the current measurement limit.

Clear: Cycle KSI.

13#Current Sensor Fault

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. Leakage to vehicle frame from phase U, V, or W (short in motor stator).
  2. Controller defective.

Set: Controller current sensors have invalid offset reading.

Clear: Cycle KSI.

14#Precharge Failed

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. External load on capacitor bank (B+ connection terminal) that prevents the capacitor bank from charging.
  2. See Monitor menu » Battery: Capacitor Voltage.

Set: Precharge failed to charge the capacitor bank to the KSI voltage.

Clear: Cycle Interlock input or use VCL function Enable_Precharge.

15#Controller Severe Undertemp

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. See Monitor menu » Controller: Temperature.
  2. Controller is operating in an extreme environment.

Set: Heatsink temperature below -40 °F (-40 °C).

Clear: Bring heatsink temperature above -40 °F (-40 °C), and cycle interlock or KSI.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 190, used with permission. SES ref PF-5IVE-5MDW‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠⁠​‍⁠‌⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 190 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
16#Controller Severe Overtemp

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍⁠‌​⁠⁠​‍‌‌⁠⁠​⁠​‌‌⁠‍‌​​

  1. See Monitor menu » Controller: Temperature.
  2. Controller is operating in an extreme environment.
  3. Excessive load on vehicle.
  4. Improper mounting of controller.

Set: Heatsink temperature above +203 °F (+95 °C)

Clear: Bring heatsink temperature below +203 °F (+95 °C), and cycle interlock or KSI.

17#Severe Undervoltage

Reduced drive torque.

  1. Battery Menu parameters are misadjusted.
  2. Non-controller system drain on battery.
  3. Battery resistance too high.
  4. Battery disconnected while driving.
  5. See Monitor menu » Battery: Capacitor Voltage.
  6. Blown B+ fuse or main contactor did not close.

Set: Capacitor bank voltage dropped below the Severe Undervoltage limit with FET bridge enabled.

Clear: Bring capacitor voltage above Severe Undervoltage limit.

18#Severe Overvoltage

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. See Monitor menu » Battery: Capacitor Voltage.
  2. Battery menu parameters are misadjusted.
  3. Battery resistance too high for given regen current.
  4. Battery disconnected while regen braking.

Set: Capacitor bank voltage exceeded the Severe Overvoltage limit with FET bridge enabled.

Clear: Bring capacitor voltage below Severe Overvoltage limit, and then cycle KSI.

22#Controller Overtemp Cutback

Reduced drive and brake torque.

  1. See Monitor menu » Controller: Temperature.
  2. Controller is performance-limited at this temperature.
  3. Controller is operating in an extreme environment.
  4. Excessive load on vehicle.
  5. Improper mounting of controller.

Set: Heatsink temperature exceeded 185 °F (85 °C).

Clear: Bring heatsink temperature below 185 °F (85 °C).

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 191, used with permission. SES ref PF-JRJI-MWQC‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍⁠‌​⁠⁠​‍‌‌⁠⁠​⁠​‌‌⁠‍‌​​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 191 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
23#Undervoltage Cutback

Reduced drive torque.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‍​‌⁠⁠‍​⁠⁠​​‌​​​⁠​⁠‍

  1. Normal operation. Fault shows that the batteries need recharging. Controller is performance limited at this voltage.
  2. Battery parameters are misadjusted.
  3. Non-controller system drain on battery.
  4. Battery resistance too high.
  5. Battery disconnected while driving.
  6. See Monitor menu » Battery: Capacitor Voltage.
  7. Blown B+ fuse or main contactor did not close.

Set: Capacitor bank voltage dropped below the Undervoltage limit with the FET bridge enabled.

Clear: Bring capacitor voltage above the Undervoltage limit.

24#Overvoltage Cutback

Note: This fault is declared only when the controller is running in regen.

Reduced brake torque.

  1. Normal operation. Fault shows that regen braking currents elevated the battery voltage during regen braking. Controller is performance limited at this voltage.
  2. Battery parameters are misadjusted.
  3. Battery resistance too high for given regen current.
  4. Battery disconnected while regen braking.
  5. See Monitor menu » Battery: Capacitor Voltage.

Set: Capacitor bank voltage exceeded the Overvoltage limit with the FET bridge enabled.

Clear: Bring capacitor voltage below the Overvoltage limit.

25#+5V Supply Failure

None, unless a fault action is programmed in Vehicle Control Language.

  1. External load impedance on the +5V supply (pin 26) is too low.
  2. See Monitor menu » outputs: 5 Volts and Ext Supply Current.

Set: +5V supply (pin 26) outside the +5V±10% range.

Clear: Bring voltage within range.

26#Digital Out 6 Overcurrent

Digital Out 6 driver will not turn on.

  1. External load impedance on Digital Output 6 driver (pin 19) is too low.

Set: Digital Output 6 (pin 19) current exceeded 15 mA.

Clear: Remedy the overcurrent cause and use the VCL function Set_DigOut() to turn the driver on again.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 192, used with permission. SES ref PF-DJDX-42D5‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‍​‌⁠⁠‍​⁠⁠​​‌​​​⁠​⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 192 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
27#Digital Out 7 Overcurrent

Digital Out 7 driver will not turn on.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠‍​⁠‌‍‍⁠‌‍‍‍‌‍⁠‍‌⁠‌‌⁠​

  1. External load impedance on Digital Output 7 driver (pin 20) is too low.

Set: Digital Output 7 (pin 20) current exceeded 15 mA.

Clear: Remedy the overcurrent cause and use the VCL function Set_DigOut() to turn the driver on again.

28#Motor Temp Hot Cutback

Reduced drive torque.

  1. Motor temperature is at or above the programmed Temperature Hot setting, and the requested current is being cut back.
  2. Motor Temperature Control Menu parameters are mis-tuned.
  3. See Monitor menu » Motor: Temperature and » Inputs: Analog2.
  4. If the application doesn’t use a motor thermistor, Temp Compensation and Temp Cutback should be programmed Off.

Set: Motor temperature is at or above the Temperature Hot parameter setting.

Clear: Bring the motor temperature within range.

29#Motor Temp Sensor Fault

MaxSpeed reduced (LOS, Limited Operating Strategy), and motor temperature cutback disabled.

  1. Motor thermistor is not connected properly.
  2. If the application doesn’t use a motor thermistor, Motor Temp Sensor Enable should be programmed Off.
  3. See Monitor menu » Motor: Temperature and » Inputs: Analog2.

Set: Motor thermistor input (pin 8) is at the voltage rail (0 or 10V).

Clear: Bring the motor thermistor input voltage within range.

31#Main Open/Short

ShutdownDriver1.

  1. Open or short on driver load.
  2. Dirty connector pins.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Driver 1(pin 6) is either open or shorted. This fault can be set only when Main Enable = Off.

Clear: Correct open or short, and cycle driver.

31#Main Open/Short

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. Open or short on driver load.
  2. Dirty connector pins.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Main contactor driver (pin 6) is either open or shorted. This fault can be set only when Main Enable = On.

Clear: Correct open or short, and cycle driver

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 193, used with permission. SES ref PF-CJUG-J6X5‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠‍​⁠‌‍‍⁠‌‍‍‍‌‍⁠‍‌⁠‌‌⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 193 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
32#Coil2 Driver Open/Short

ShutdownDriver2.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‍​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠​⁠‌‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍‍‍‍

  1. Open or short on driver load.
  2. Dirty connector pins.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Driver 2 (pin 5) is either open or shorted. This fault can be set only when EM Brake Type = 0.

Clear: Correct open or short, and cycle driver.

32#EMBrake Open/Short

ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake.

  1. Open or short on driver load.
  2. Dirty connector pins.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Electromagnetic brake driver (pin 5) is either open or shorted. This fault can be set only when EM Brake Type > 0.

Clear: Correct open or short, and cycle driver.

33#Coil3 Driver Open/Short

ShutdownDriver3.

  1. Open or short on driver load.
  2. Dirty connector pins.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Driver 3 (pin 4) is either open or shorted.

Clear: Correct open or short, and cycle driver.

34#Coil4 Driver Open/Short

ShutdownDriver4.

  1. Open or short on driver load.
  2. Dirty connector pins.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Driver 4 (pin 3) is either open or shorted.

Clear: Correct open or short, and cycle driver.

35#PD Open/Short

ShutdownPD.

  1. Open or short on driver load.
  2. Dirty connector pins.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Proportional driver (pin 2) is either open or shorted.

Clear: Correct open or short, and cycle driver.

36#Encoder Fault

ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle.

  1. Motor encoder failure.
  2. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.
  3. See Monitor menu » Motor: Motor RPM.

Set: Motor encoder phase failure detected.

Clear: Cycle KSI.

37#Motor Open

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. Motor phase is open.
  2. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.

Set: Motor phase U, V, or W detected open.

Clear: Cycle KSI.

38#Main Contactor Welded

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. Main contactor tips are welded closed.
  2. Motor phase U or V is disconnected or open.
  3. An alternate voltage path (such as an external precharge resistor) is providing a current to the capacitor bank (B+ connection terminal).

Set: Just prior to the main contactor closing, the capacitor bank voltage (B+ connection terminal) was loaded for a short time and the voltage did not discharge.

Clear: Cycle KSI

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 194, used with permission. SES ref PF-GFME-Y5KQ‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‍​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠​⁠‌‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍‍‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 194 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
39#Main Contactor Did Not Close

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌‍​‌⁠‍‌‌‍​⁠⁠‌​‍‌⁠‌⁠​​‌

  1. Main contactor did not close.
  2. Main contactor tips are oxidized, burned, or not making good contact.
  3. External load on capacitor bank (B+ connection terminal) that prevents capacitor bank from charging.
  4. Blown B+ fuse.

Set: With the main contactor commanded closed, the capacitor bank voltage (B+ connection terminal) did not charge to B+.

Clear: Cycle KSI.

41#Throttle Wiper High

ShutdownThrottle.

  1. See Monitor menu » Inputs: Throttle Pot.
  2. Throttle Pot. wiper voltage too high.

Set: Throttle pot wiper (pin 16) voltage is higher than the high fault threshold (can be changed with the VCL function Setup_Pot_Faults).

Clear: Bring throttle pot wiper voltage below the fault threshold.

42#Throttle Wiper Low

ShutdownThrottle.

  1. See Monitor menu » Inputs: Throttle Pot.
  2. Throttle pot wiper voltage too low.

Set: Throttle pot wiper (pin 16) voltage is lower than the low fault threshold (can be changed with the VCL function Setup_Pot_Faults).

Clear: Bring throttle pot wiper voltage above the fault threshold.

43#Pot2 Wiper High

FullBrake.

  1. See Monitor menu » Inputs: Pot2 Raw.
  2. Pot2 wiper voltage too high.

Set: Pot2 wiper (pin 17) voltage is higher than the high fault threshold (can be changed with the VCL function Setup_Pot_Faults()).

Clear: Bring Pot2 wiper voltage below the fault threshold.

44#Pot2 Wiper Low

FullBrake.

  1. See Monitor menu » Inputs: Pot2 Raw.
  2. Pot2 wiper voltage too low.

Set: Pot2 wiper (pin 17) voltage is lower than the low fault threshold (can be changed with the VCL function Setup_Pot_Faults()).

Clear: Bring Pot2 wiper voltage above the fault threshold.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 195, used with permission. SES ref PF-BRSI-Q3SN‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌‍​‌⁠‍‌‌‍​⁠⁠‌​‍‌⁠‌⁠​​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 195 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
45#Pot Low Overcurrent

ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌⁠​⁠‌⁠​‍​‍​​‌‌​​‌⁠​‌‍‍

  1. See Monitor menu » Outputs: Pot Low.
  2. Combined pot resistance connected to pot low is too low.

Set: Pot low (pin 18) current exceeds 10 mA.

Clear: Clear pot low overcurrent condition and cycle KSI.

46#EEPROM Failure

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; ShutdownInterlock; ShutdownDriver1; ShutdownDriver2; ShutdownDriver3; ShutdownDriver4; ShutdownPD; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. Failure to write to EEPROM memory. This can be caused by EEPROM memory writes initiated by VCL (Vehicle Control Language), by the CAN Bus, by adjusting parameters with the programmer, or by loading new software into the controller.

Set: Controller operating system tried to write to EEPROM memory and failed.

Clear: Download the correct software (OS) and matching parameter default settings into the controller and cycle KSI.

47#HPD/Sequencing Fault

ShutdownThrottle.

  1. KSI, interlock, direction, and throttle inputs applied in incorrect sequence.
  2. Faulty wiring, crimps, or switches at KSI, interlock, direction, or throttle inputs.
  3. See Monitor menu » Inputs.

Set: HPD (High Pedal Disable) or sequencing fault caused by incorrect sequence of KSI, interlock, direction, and throttle inputs.

Clear: Reapply inputs in correct sequence.

47#Emer Rev HPD

ShutdownThrottle; ShutdownEMBrake.

  1. Emergency Reverse operation has concluded, but the throttle, forward and reverse inputs, and interlock have not been returned to neutral.

Set: At the conclusion of Emergency Reverse, the fault was set because various inputs were not returned to neutral.

Clear: If EMR_Interlock = On, clear the interlock, throttle, and direction inputs. If EMR_Interlock = Off, clear the throttle and direction inputs.

49#Parameter Change Fault

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. This is a safety fault caused by a change in certain parameter settings so that the vehicle will not operate until KSI is cycled. For example, if a user changes the Throttle Type this fault will appear and require cycling KSI before the vehicle can operate.

Set: Adjustment of a parameter setting that requires cycling of KSI.

Clear: Cycle KSI.

51–67#OEM Faults
  1. These faults can be defined by the OEM, These faults are not used on the SC6500

Set: Not Applicable.

Clear: Not Applicable.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 196, used with permission. SES ref PF-QT4P-IH7R‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌⁠​⁠‌⁠​‍​‍​​‌‌​​‌⁠​‌‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 196 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
68#VCL (Vehicle Control Language) Run Time Error

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; ShutdownInterlock; ShutdownDriver1; ShutdownDriver2; ShutdownDriver3; ShutdownDriver4; ShutdownPD; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‍⁠​​‍‌‌‌‍​‍‌‍

  1. VCL code encountered a runtime VCL error.
  2. See Monitor menu » Controller: VCL Error Module and VCL Error. This error can then be compared to the runtime VCL module ID and error code definitions found in the specific OS system information file.

Set: Runtime VCL code error condition.

Clear: Edit VCL application software to fix this error condition; flash the new compiled software and matching parameter defaults; cycle KSI.

69#External Supply Out of Range

None, unless a fault action is programmed in VCL.

  1. External load on the 5V and 12V supplies draws either too much or too little current.
  2. Fault Checking Menu parameters Ext Supply Max and Ext Supply Min are mis-tuned.
  3. See Monitor menu » Outputs: Ext Supply Current.

Set: The external supply current (combined current used by the 5V supply [pin 26] and 12V supply [pin 25]) is either greater than the upper current threshold or than the lower current threshold. The thresholds are defined by the External Supply Max and External Supply Min parameter settings.

Clear: Bring the external supply current within range.

71#OS General

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; ShutdownInterlock; ShutdownDriver1; ShutdownDriver2; ShutdownDriver3; ShutdownDriver4; ShutdownPD; FullBrake; ShutdownPump.

  1. Internal controller fault.

Set: Internal controller fault detected.

Clear: Cycle KSI.

72#PDO Timeout

ShutdownInterlock; CAN NMT State set to Pre-operational.

  1. Time between CAN PDO messages received exceeded the PDO Timeout Period.

Set: Time between CAN PDO messages received exceeded the PDO Timeout Period.

Clear: Cycle KSI or receive CAN NMT message.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 197, used with permission. SES ref PF-IN73-M77L‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‍⁠​​‍‌‌‌‍​‍‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 197 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set / clear conditions
73#Stall Detected

ShutdownEMBrake; Control Mode changed to LOS (Limited Operating Strategy).‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌​​‍‍​⁠‌​‌⁠​​‍⁠​⁠‌‍⁠​‌

  1. Stalled motor.
  2. Motor encoder failure.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.
  4. Problems with power supply for the motor encoder.
  5. See Monitor menu » Motor: Motor RPM.

Set: No motor encoder movement detected.

Clear: Either cycle KSI, or detect valid motor encoder signals while operating in LOS mode and return Throttle Command = 0 and Motor RPM = 0.

74#Fault On Other Traction Controller
  1. Dual Drive fault: see Dual Drive manual.
75#Dual Severe Fault
  1. Dual Drive fault: see Dual Drive manual.
77#Supervisor Fault

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; ShutdownInterlock; ShutdownDriver1; ShutdownDriver2; ShutdownDriver3; ShutdownDriver4; ShutdownPD; FullBrake; ShutdownPump

  1. The Supervisor has detected a mismatch in redundant readings.
  2. Internal damage to Supervisor microprocessor.
  3. Switch inputs allowed to be within upper and lower thresholds for over 100 milliseconds.

Set: Mismatched redundant readings; damaged Supervisor; illegal switch inputs.

Clear: Check for noise or voltage drift in all switch inputs; check connections; cycle KSI.

78#Supervisor Incompatible

ShutdownMotor; ShutdownMainContactor; ShutdownEMBrake; ShutdownThrottle; ShutdownInterlock; ShutdownDriver1; ShutdownDriver2; ShutdownDriver3; ShutdownDriver4; ShutdownPD; FullBrake; ShutdownPump

  1. The main OS is not compatible with the Supervisor OS.

Set: Incompatible software.

Clear: Load properly matched OS code or update the Supervisor code; cycle KSI.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 198, used with permission. SES ref PF-644E-XKU2‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌​​‍‍​⁠‌​‌⁠​​‍⁠​⁠‌‍⁠​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 198 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

In shortEach flash code below lists what the controller shuts down, the possible causes, and what sets and clears the fault. Codes 87 through 99 are on pages 199 to 201. If you are stuck, call us at 800-440-6723.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‍⁠‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​​‌‍⁠​‍‌‍
Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set/clear conditions
87#

Motor characterization fault‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‍⁠‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​​‌‍⁠​‍‌‍

  • ShutdownMotor
  • ShutdownMainContactor
  • ShutdownEMBrake
  • ShutdownThrottle
  • FullBrake
  • ShutdownPump
  1. Motor characterization failed during characterization process. See Monitor menu » Controller: Motor Characterization Error for cause:
    • 0=none
    • 1=encoder signal seen, but step size not determined; set Encoder Step Size manually
    • 2=motor temp sensor fault
    • 3=motor temp hot cutback fault
    • 4=controller overtemp cutback fault
    • 5=controller undertemp cutback fault
    • 6=undervoltage cutback fault
    • 7=severe overvoltage fault
    • 8=encoder signal not seen, or one both channels missing
    • 9=motor parameters out of characterization range.

Set: Motor characterization failed during the motor characterization process.

Clear: Correct fault; cycle KSI.

88#

Encoder pulse error

  • ShutdownMotor
  • ShutdownMainContactor
  • ShutdownEMBrake
  • ShutdownThrottle
  • ShutdownInterlock
  • ShutdownDriver1
  • ShutdownDriver2
  • ShutdownDriver3
  • ShutdownDriver4
  • ShutdownPD
  • FullBrake
  • ShutdownPump
  1. Encoder Steps parameter does not match the actual motor encoder

Set: Motor lost IFO control and accelerated without throttle command.

Clear: Ensure the Encoder Steps parameter matches the actual encoder; cycle KSI.

89#

Motor type fault

  • ShutdownMotor
  • ShutdownMainContactor
  • ShutdownEMBrake
  • ShutdownThrottle
  • FullBrake
  • ShutdownPump
  1. The Motor_Type parameter value is out of range.

Set: Motor_Type parameter is set to an illegal value.

Clear: Set Motor_Type to correct value and cycle KSI.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 199, used with permission. SES ref PF-7FNI-L5GS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‍⁠‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​​‌‍⁠​‍‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 199 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set/clear conditions
91#

VCL/OS mismatch‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​⁠​‌​⁠‍⁠‌‍​‌‍‌‍‌⁠‍‍‌‌‍

  • ShutdownMotor
  • ShutdownMainContactor
  • ShutdownEMBrake
  • ShutdownThrottle
  • ShutdownInterlock
  • ShutdownDriver1
  • ShutdownDriver2
  • ShutdownDriver3
  • ShutdownDriver4
  • ShutdownPD
  • FullBrake
  • ShutdownPump
  1. The VCL software in the controller does not match the OS software in the controller.

Set: VCL and OS software do not match; when KSI cycles, a check is made to verify that they match and a fault is issued when they do not.

Clear: Download the correct VCL and OS software into the controller.

92#

EM brake failed to set

  • ShutdownEMBrake
  • ShutdownThrottle
  • Position Hold is engaged when Interlock=On.
  1. Vehicle movement sensed after the EM Brake has been commanded to set.
  2. EM Brake will not hold the motor from rotating.

Set: After the EM Brake was commanded to set and time has elapsed to allow the brake to fully engage, vehicle movement has been sensed.

Clear: Activate the throttle.

93#

Encoder LOS (Limited Operating Strategy)

  • Enter LOS control mode.
  1. Limited Operating Strategy control mode has been activated, a result of either an Encoder (Code 36) or a Stall Detect (Code 73).
  2. Motor encoder failure.
  3. Bad crimps or faulty wiring.
  4. Vehicle is stalled.

Set: Encoder Fault (Code 36) or Stall Detect Fault (Code 73) was activated, and Brake or Interlock has been applied to activate LOS control mode, allowing limited motor control.

Clear: Cycle KSI or, if LOS mode was activated by the Stall Fault, clear by ensuring encoder senses proper operation, Motor RPM = 0, and Throttle Command = 0.

94#

Emer rev timeout

  • ShutdownEMBrake
  • ShutdownThrottle
  1. Emergency Reverse was activated and concluded because the EMR Timeout timer has expired.
  2. The emergency reverse input is stuck On.

Set: Emergency Reverse was activated and ran until the EMR Timeout timer expired.

Clear: Turn the emergency reverse input Off.

98#

Illegal model number

  • ShutdownMotor
  • ShutdownMainContactor
  • ShutdownEMBrake
  • ShutdownThrottle
  • FullBrake
  • ShutdownPump
  1. Model_Number variable contains illegal value. For 1234E/36E/38E models, a value other than 1234, 1236, 1238, or 1298 is illegal. For 1232E models, a value other than 1232 is illegal.
  2. Software and hardware do not match.
  3. Controller defective.

Set: Illegal Model_Number variable; when KSI cycles, a check is made to confirm a legal Model_Number, and a fault is issued if one is not found.

Clear: Download appropriate software for your controller model.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 200, used with permission. SES ref PF-MIQC-IY2G‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​⁠​‌​⁠‍⁠‌‍​‌‍‌‍‌⁠‍‍‌‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 200 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting chart

Flash code #Programmer LCD display / effect of faultPossible cause(s)Set/clear conditions
99#

Dualmotor parameter mismatch‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌‌‍‌‌‍⁠⁠‌‍‌‌‍​‌​‍⁠‍⁠‍

  1. Dual Drive fault: see Dual Drive manual.

Fault history

The 1313 programmer can be used to access the controller’s fault history file. The programmer will read out all the faults the controller has experienced since the last time the fault history file was cleared. Faults such as contactor faults may be the result of loose wires; contactor wiring should be carefully checked. Faults such as over temperature may be caused by operator habits or by overloading.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 201, used with permission. SES ref PF-JX24-PJFI‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​‌‌‍‌‌‍⁠⁠‌‍‌‌‍​‌​‍⁠‍⁠‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 201 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Removal and installation

In shortThe drive tire can be changed without taking out the whole wheel drive and spindle assembly. The machine has to be jacked up and supported on stands, and the new hub fasteners need Loctite and specific torque, covered on page 204.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌‍‍‍⁠
Warning! Before removing or reinstalling any machine components, make sure the key switch is off, the key is removed from the machine and the parking brake is engaged.

Front drive wheel/tire removal

Note: It is not necessary to remove the complete wheel drive/spindle assembly to service the drive tire only.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌‍‍‍⁠

Warning! Turn the key switch off and disconnect the battery pack.
Engage the machine parking brake and block both rear wheels so machine can’t roll.
Never work under machine without safety stands or blocking to support the machine.
  1. Jack up the front of the vehicle so that the front wheel is off the ground and support the vehicle safely on jack stands.
  2. Turn the wheel so that the drive hub is facing forward. Remove the 4 fasteners in the center.
Photo of the front drive wheel seen from the side with the drive wheel hub facing out; arrows point to the drive wheel hub and to the 4 fasteners in its center to remove
Fig. 202-1
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 202, used with permission. SES ref PF-GMJM-CISA‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌‍‍‍⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 202 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Turn the wheel so that the motor is facing forward. Remove the tire/wheel assembly using special Tire Puller Kit 56422174
    1. Insert the “puller” extractor screws in the casting threaded holes as shown and turn them in until each screw touches the rim of the tire. Then turn all of them evenly in small increments until the wheel is pushed off the support bearing.
    2. Remove puller screws
Photo of the front drive wheel with the motor facing forward; four arrows point to the threaded holes for the puller screws in the casting around the motor
Fig. 203-1: threaded holes for “puller” screws
Exploded drawing showing the blue tire and wheel assembly sliding off the gearbox hub and support bearing of the drive motor
Fig. 203-2: tire/wheel assembly removal
  1. Remove 10 fasteners around the perimeter of the drive wheel hub and separate the drive wheel hub from the wheel/tire.
Exploded drawing of the wheel and tire with the drive wheel hub and its 10 perimeter fasteners shown pulled out to the side
Fig. 203-3: drive wheel hub fasteners
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 203, used with permission. SES ref PF-T3WN-YHZ4‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​‍‍‍‌‍‌‌⁠‌⁠‌​‌⁠‌‌‌​​​‌
Service Manual – SC6500Page 203 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Front drive wheel/tire installation

  1. Install the drive hub to the new wheel/tire using the 10 fasteners. Apply Loctite 648 (or equivalent) on the fasteners. Torque to 16 ft-lb (20-22 N·m).
Drawing of the drive hub on the wheel and tire with the 10 perimeter fasteners numbered 1 through 10 in tightening order, with a curved arrow showing the direction
Fig. 204-1: fastener tightening order
  1. Lightly install the two alignment pins from the tire puller kit into two of the threaded holes of the gearbox hub flange.
Drawing of the drive motor and gearbox hub flange with two alignment pins threaded in and red arrows pointing at them
Fig. 204-2: alignment pins
  1. Slide the drive hub with the wheel/tire over the alignment pins.
Drawing of the wheel and tire being slid over the alignment pins onto the gearbox hub, with a red arrow showing the direction
Fig. 204-3: sliding the wheel over the pins
  1. Apply Loctite 243 (or equivalent) to the 4 hub center fasteners. Remove the alignment pins, and install the 4 fasteners.
  2. In small increments, simultaneously tighten all four screws. Torque to 55 ft-lb (75 N·m).
Drawing of the installed wheel with the 4 hub center fasteners numbered 1 through 4 in tightening order
Fig. 204-4: hub center fastener order
Parts for this job
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 204, used with permission. SES ref PF-MZBZ-HPWM‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌‍​‍‌‌‍⁠‌​‌​‌‌⁠​‌‍‌​⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 204 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wheel drive assembly

Warning! Turn the key switch off and disconnect the battery pack.
Engage the machine parking brake and block both rear wheels so machine can’t roll.
  1. Disconnect the battery pack.
  2. Jack up the front of the vehicle so that the front wheel is off the ground and support the vehicle safely on jack stands.
  3. Turn the wheel so that the motor is facing forward.
  4. Remove the two screws securing the plastic cover over the motor cable connections and remove the cover.
Photo of the front drive wheel with the motor facing forward; arrows point to the two screws and the plastic cover to remove
Fig. 205-1: remove 2 screws and plastic cover
  1. Mark the U, V and W cables for correct reassembly. Disconnect the small motor sensor connector
Photo of the motor cable connections; arrows point to the three U, V and W cable connection points to mark and to the small motor sensor connector to disconnect
Fig. 205-2: mark cable locations, disconnect sensor connector
  1. Disconnect the U, V and W cables from the motor using a “back-up” wrench on the nut behind the cable to prevent the stud from rotating.
Close-up photo of a motor terminal stud; arrows point to the nut securing the cable to remove and to the nut behind it where the back-up wrench goes
Fig. 205-3: back-up wrench and cable nuts
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 205, used with permission. SES ref PF-OGHR-ZEPU‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍‌‍​​⁠‍‍‌‍​‌‍⁠‍‌⁠‍‌⁠‍​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 205 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
  1. Loosen the four Screws from underneath the front of the machine and push the lower steering column toward the rear of the machine. This will allow you to separate the Chain from the Steer Sprocket
  2. Remove the P clamp securing the wiring harness to the splash guard and move the wiring harness aside.
  3. Remove the false floor plate in the operator compartment (held with three screws) to allow access to the top spindle mounting hardware.
  4. Remove the Bearing Dust Cap, Cotter Pin and Castle Nut from the spindle shaft.
Exploded drawing of the steering spindle and wheel drive assembly with labels for bearing dust cap, cotter pin, castle nut, screw (4) at the top, screw (4) at the spindle plate, steer sprocket, chain and P-clamp
Fig. 206-1: spindle, steer sprocket and chain

Labels on the drawing: Bearing Dust Cap; Cotter Pin; Castle Nut; Screw (4) (two places); Steer Sprocket; Chain; P-clamp.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‌​⁠‍​⁠​⁠‍‌‍​‍​‍‌‍​‌‌‍

Warning! Never work under machine without safety stands or blocking to support the machine.
  1. Safely jack up or lift up the front of the machine 8-10 in (20-25 cm) from the center bottom edge of the solution tank.
  2. Carefully guide the wheel motor assembly down and out of its frame opening. Tilt the wheel motor assembly to the side while raising the machine, then pull it out from underneath the machine.

    Note: Be careful not to damage the threads and bearing surfaces when dropping the spindle shaft down through the frame when removing it from the chassis.

  3. Inspect the bearings and seal and replace as needed. If further service work is needed, remove the six Screws to separate the spindle/steer plate weldment and splash fender from the gear box housing.
  4. Reassemble the steering spindle and wheel drive assembly by following the above steps in reverse order.

    Note: Tighten the Castle Nut to eliminate any bearing play, then back off the Castle Nut enough to install a new Cotter Pin.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 206, used with permission. SES ref PF-KYGZ-ZZTS‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‌​⁠‍​⁠​⁠‍‌‍​‍​‍‌‍​‌‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 206 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Potentiometer testing

In shortThe drive pedal potentiometer is a 5K ohm part that should read about 5000 ohms (plus or minus 500) across its outside terminals. With the pedal in neutral the voltage at the controller should be 2.48 to 2.52 volts; if error code 03 shows, check and readjust.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‍‍⁠‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌​​​‌‍​‌​⁠‍‍‍

Note: Do not remove the potentiometer from the pedal assembly.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‍‍⁠‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌​​​‌‍​‌​⁠‍‍‍

  1. Test the Potentiometer using an ohmmeter (the pot specification is 5K Ohms).
  2. Connect the meter leads to each of the outside connections on the Potentiometer. The meter should read approximately 5000 Ohms (plus or minus 500 Ohms).
  3. Move one of the test leads to the middle connection and move the pedal in both directions. The resistance value should change smoothly and proportionally as the pedal angle changes.
  4. If you do not get these results, replace the Pedal Assembly.

Drive pedal installation

  1. Remove the pedal assembly mounting screws and remove the pedal.
  2. Install the new drive pedal and mounting screws.
  3. The potentiometer comes pre-adjusted and does not require adjustment.

Drive pedal neutral adjustment and pedal replacement

The drive pedal comes with the potentiometer attached and pre-adjusted. However, if the potentiometer position on the pedal changes it can be adjusted.

  1. Block the rear wheels and jack the front wheel up off the floor.
  2. Back-probe the potentiometer throttle wiper input signal wire at the Speed Controller with your red voltmeter lead.
  3. Back-probe the pot low wire at the Speed Controller with your black voltmeter lead.
  4. Turn the key on.
  5. Slightly loosen the potentiometer mounting screws, just enough so that you will be able to rotate the potentiometer on the pedal.
  6. With the drive pedal in the spring loaded center (neutral) position, rotate the potentiometer until the voltmeter reads 2.48 to 2.52 volts, then tighten the mounting screws.

Service Note: Also confirm that the Hourmeter/Status Display is free of the error code 03 (drive system fault). If error 03 is shown, the throttle is not set correctly for the potentiometer and/or drive pedal neutral position. Check both again and readjust.

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 207, used with permission. SES ref PF-4A6P-HBON‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‍‍⁠‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌​​​‌‍​‌​⁠‍‍‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 207 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Wheel drive controller replacement

Warning! The Curtis controller is inherently a high-power device. When working around any battery-powered vehicle, appropriate safety precautions must be taken. These include, but are not limited to: proper training, wearing eye protection, avoiding loose clothing and jewelry, and using insulated wrenches.
  1. Disconnect the main power connector.
  2. Remove the electrical panel cover to gain access to the controller.
  3. Label the power and motor cables to aid in correct reassembly.
  4. Remove the bolts securing the motor and power cables to their respective controller lugs.
  5. Disconnect the low current connector.
  6. Remove controller attaching screws and remove the controller.
  7. Reassemble in reverse order. When attaching cables use the correct hardware in the correct order to avoid damage caused from a loose connection. Torque to 90 in-lb (10.17 N·m).
Close-up photo of a controller circuit board with a damaged, dark-colored lug where a cable terminal was attached
Fig. 14: Damaged controller lug from loose connection (case removed for clarity)
Side-view drawing of the drive controller with its cable terminal and the hardware stack in order: flat washer, internal-tooth shake-proof washer, and hex screw
Fig. 15: Wheel drive controller cable hardware order

Labels on Fig. 15: Drive Controller; Cable Terminal; WSH, FLT SAE 1/4; WSH, INT SHPRF 1/4; SCR-HEX M6-1 X 25mm.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‌​‌​⁠‌‍⁠‍‌​⁠‌​‍‌‍​​‌‍

  1. Check for proper operation of the wheel drive system with the wheel off the ground first, before operating the vehicle

Specifications

General specifications

ComponentSpecifications
Drive motor assemblySpeed – 5.9 mph (9.5 km/h)
Wheel load (solution tank full) – 1133 lb (523 kg)
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 208, used with permission. SES ref PF-SKON-IAIP‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‌​‌​⁠‌‍⁠‍‌​⁠‌​‍‌‍​​‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 208 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Speed mode table

Mode 1, pin 10Mode 2, pin 11Effect
Low – 0VLow – 0VTransport Mode (Mode #1)
High – 19VLow – 0VScrub Mode (Mode #2)
Low – 0VHigh – 19VTraction Mode (Mode #3)
High – 19VHigh – 19VN/A
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 209, used with permission. SES ref PF-YZ7H-RXX2‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍‌‍⁠​‍​‍‌‌⁠‌⁠​⁠⁠‍​‌‌⁠​
Service Manual – SC6500Page 209 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Specifications

In shortThese are voltages measured on a real machine with the key on and a battery at 38.52 V. They are not specifications, but they help you tell normal from abnormal at the controller’s 35-pin connector.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​⁠​⁠⁠​⁠‌‍​‌‌​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌‍

Shop measurements

Shop measurements are values that were measured on a real machine. While they are not “specifications”, they can help you recognize normal vs. abnormal.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​⁠​⁠⁠​⁠‌‍​‌‌​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌‍

Wheel drive controller voltage measurements

All voltages are DC unless otherwise stated and were measured with the negative (black) voltmeter lead on battery negative and the key switch on. Battery voltage was 38.52 V at time of testing.

Low current 35 pin connector (X6)

Photo of the 35-pin low current connector on the controller with colored wires in its pins
Fig. 210-1: X6 connector photo
Pin layout of the 35-pin connector seen from the wire side: bottom row pins 1 to 12 running right to left, middle row 13 to 23, top row 24 to 35, with a latch tab at the bottom
Fig. 210-2: X6 pin numbering
PinWire colorCircuitVoltage
1ORNKey switch input. Provides logic power for the controller and power for the coil drivers.37.67 V
2Not used
3ORN/REDFault (Curtis Driver 4)34.37 V with no current faults
4YEL/REDDirection (Curtis Driver 3)

34.37 V Forward or Stationary

0.004 V Reverse

5RED/WHTMotion (Curtis Driver 2)

25.85 V Stationary

0.005 V Moving (Forward or Reverse)

6BLK/YELK7 Main Contactor Driver (Curtis Driver 1)

37.7 V key on (contactor off)

When seat switch closes, momentary drop to 1.7 V to turn on contactor. Then stabilizes at 9.1 V to hold contactor on.

7BLK/PINKSensor ground reference. (Internal connection to B-) (Curtis I/O ground)0.018 V with motor running
8TAN/REDMotor Temperature Sensor (Curtis Analog 2 or Switch 2)

1.24 V (Room Temp)

12 7 V (open circuit)

9GRNInterlock Switch Input (Curtis Switch 3)37.65 V
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 210, used with permission. SES ref PF-6G2C-K4PB‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​⁠​⁠⁠​⁠‌‍​‌‌​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 210 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL
PinWire colorCircuitVoltage
10BLU/BLKMode 1 (Curtis Switch 4)

0.003 V Key on‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‍‌⁠​​‍‍​​‍​​⁠‌‍‍​​​‍‌‍

19.2 V Scrub on

0.09 V Scrub on and (“Rabbit” speed or Traction Control on.)

11BLK/WHTMode 2 (Curtis Switch 5)

0.003 V Traction Control off

19.1 V Traction Control on

12Not used
13Not used
14Not used
15VIO/BLKThrottle POT High (5 V supply)5.31 V
16BRN/REDThrottle POT wiper (Pedal potentiometer Input)

4.91 V Full Forward

2.72 V Neutral

0.51 V Full Reverse

17Not used
18WHT/BLKThrottle POT Low0.21 V
19Not used
20Not used
21Not used
22Not used
23Not used
24Not used
25VIO/WHTUnregulated low power +12 V output. (Power for Programmer Connector)12.99 V
26PINK/REDRegulated low power +5v output5.03 V
27Not used
28WHT/ORNSerial Transmit for Programmer Connector0.11 V
29BLU/GRNSerial Receive for Programmer Connector

0.002 V

Momentary jump to 4 V when programmer is connected

30Not used
31PINK/WHTDrive Motor Encoder Signal - Phase A

4.80 V or 0.12 V stationary

2.3 V wheel spinning any speed

32PINK/BLUDrive Motor Encoder Signal - Phase B

4.84 V or 0.12 V stationary

2.3 V wheel spinning any speed

33Not used
34Not used
35Not used

Motor U, V and W terminal pair voltages

  • U to V, V to W or W to U - 63 mVAC with stationary motor. 11.8 VAC with wheel off ground and full forward speed maintained.
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 211, used with permission. SES ref PF-2MFD-JNYT‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‍‌⁠​​‍‍​​‍​​⁠‌‍‍​​​‍‌‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 211 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Motor U, V and W terminal pair frequency

  • U to V, V to W or W to U - 130 Hz at full forward speed.

Wheel speed controller current draw

Measured with amp clamp around battery negative feed to wheel drive controller.‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​⁠‍‌‍‍​‍​⁠⁠​‍​⁠‍‍‌‍​⁠

  • Key on - 0.40 Amps DC
  • Full forward speed, wheel off ground - 5.9 Amps DC
  • Transport - Heavy acceleration up to around 68 Amps DC. Maintain full forward speed on level floor around 30 Amps DC

Main contactor (K7)

Winding resistance at room temperature: 100 ohms

Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 212, used with permission. SES ref PF-NSOC-OLRT‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​⁠‍‌‍‍​‍​⁠⁠​‍​⁠‍‍‌‍​⁠
Service Manual – SC6500Page 212 of 213
SERVICE MANUAL

Special tools

ToolPhoto
Curtis hand-held programmer, model 1311-1101, part number 56409441
Photo of the Curtis 1311-1101 hand-held programmer with a green display, directional pad and three yellow buttons
Curtis 1311-1101 programmer
Curtis hand-held programmer, model 1313-1101, part number 56383571
Photo of the Curtis 1313-1101 hand-held programmer with a dark display, keypad and cable
Curtis 1313-1101 programmer

Tire Puller Kit 56422174‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠​‍‌‍‌​​‌⁠‌‌‍​‌​⁠​‍‍​‍

Consists of threaded screws to push the wheel off the bearing and pilot studs for aligning drive hub threads during installation.

Photo of the tire puller kit: a bag labeled 56422174 tire puller kit with long threaded screws and shorter pilot studs
Tire Puller Kit 56422174
Source: Advance SC6500 Service Manual 56043168 Rev. 01/15 Revised 12/17, page 213, used with permission. SES ref PF-4VAO-ELZL‌‌​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​​​​⁠‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠​‍‌‍‌​​‌⁠‌‌‍​‌​⁠​‍‍​‍
Service Manual – SC6500Page 213 of 213

Advance is a trademark of Nilfisk, Inc. Southeastern Equipment & Supply is an independent dealer.